Samsung TracFone SCH S968C Galaxy S III (7.1 MB) TF English User Manual MG3 F5

User Manual: Samsung (7.1 MB) Samsung Galaxy S3 SCH-S968C User Manual | Manual Device

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 474

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

M O B I L E

P H O N E

User Manual
Please read this manual before operating your
phone and keep it for future reference.

GH68-39270B Print 1.1 Printed in Korea

Warning! This product contains chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive toxicity.

Intellectual Property
All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is
otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers
relating to the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to,
accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the “Phone
System”), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal
laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual
Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or
unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software,
computer programs, and related documentation and other works of
authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights
secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you
will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare derivative works of,
reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to
create source code from the software. No title to or ownership in the
Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the
Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers.

Open Source Software
Some software components of this product incorporate source code
covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser
General Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and
other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under
the open source licenses, please visit:
http://opensource.samsung.com.
TF_S968C_UM_English_MG3_121613_F5

Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of
Liability
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON
THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES
NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER
WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR
QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT;
THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS
CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE
REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT
PERTAINING THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO
THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR
USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE
EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR
BENEFITS.
Modification of Software
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR
INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY
SETTINGS, OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM
SOFTWARE.

USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR
DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. YOUR CARRIER
MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE,
SUCH AS CUSTOM OS.
SAFE™ (Samsung Approved For Enterprise)
SAFE™: "SAFE™" (Samsung for Enterprise) is a mark for a
Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung's own
internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party
security-related solutions for MDM and VPN. The testing includes
field testing with local network connection and menu tree testing
which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the
Samsung device. During the testing, the device is tested with the
security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as
described by the third party security solution providers. The testing,
for example, includes field testing with local network connection and
menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in
conjunction with the Samsung device. For more information about
Samsung's SAFE™ program, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/
safe.
Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN
THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY, TO THE FULL
EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.,
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND THEIR
AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE
"SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™

DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF
ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ DEVICES OR
APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. In addition,
information technology security protection will be affected by
features or functionality associated with, among other things the email platform, master data management, and virtual private network
solutions selected by the software provider, solution provider or user.
Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private
network solution is at the sole discretion of the software provider,
solution provider or user and any associated effect on information
technology security protection is solely the responsibility of the
software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement
of limited warranty, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe,
available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy
Tab™ devices are sold. [101212]

Samsung Telecommunications America
(STA), LLC
Headquarters:
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, TX 75082

Customer Care Center:
1000 Klein Rd.
Plano, TX 75074
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Internet Address:
http://www.samsung.com
©2013

Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a
registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.

Do you have questions about your Samsung Device?
For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS
System (Automated Response System) at:
www.samsung.com/us/support
The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the
specified capacity because the operating system and default
applications occupy part of the memory. The available capacity may
change when you upgrade the device.
Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,
Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
ACCESS® and NetFront™ are trademarks or registered trademarks
of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and
combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.

microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card
Association.
Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play,
Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google Talk,
Hangouts, Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of
Google Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010
Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.
, DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are
trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used
under license.
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including
premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,
LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX
Certified® device that has passed rigorous testing to verify that it
plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and
software tools to convert your files into DivX videos.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must
be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD
section in your device setup menu (tap Apps > Settings > About
device > Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD >
Register). Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to
complete your registration.

Table of Contents
Section 1: Getting Started ....................................................8
Understanding this User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Battery Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Extending Your Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Initial Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Switching the Device On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Restarting the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Locking and Unlocking the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Creating a New Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Signing into Your Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Retrieving your Google Account Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Confirming the Default Image and Video Storage Location . . . . . . 24
Creating a Samsung Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Google Now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Section 2: Understanding Your Device ..............................31
Features of Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Gestures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Multi Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31
34
37
38
39
39
49
50
54
55
58
61

Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Customizing the Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Section 3: Call Functions and Contacts List ......................79
Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ending a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing Reject Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
International Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pause Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wait Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redialing the Last Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using S Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

79
79
81
82
83
84
85
87
87
88
88
89
91
93
99

Section 4: Entering Text ...................................................104
Text Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Text Input Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Text Using Swype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Samsung Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Google Voice Typing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

104
105
105
111
117

Section 5: Contacts ..........................................................119
Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joining Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

119
120
125
130
131
132
133

Sending a Namecard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronizing Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding more Contacts via Accounts and Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Contact Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Favorites Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

136
138
139
140
141
144
146
149

Section 6: Messages ........................................................150
Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating and Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Newly Received Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Google Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hangouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

150
151
153
157
160
161
161
165
166
172
179
182
183
183

Section 7: Multimedia ......................................................185
Assigning the Default Storage Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Camera Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sharing Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Movies & TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

185
186
188
197
209
216
217
222
223

Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Samsung Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AllShare Cast Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

232
235
235
236
237
237
243
247

Section 8: Applications and Development .......................248
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Google . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Google Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hangouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
My Account Downloader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

249
249
250
253
253
254
258
258
258
259
259
259
260
260
261
262
262
262
263
264
268
268
268
269

My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Movies & TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading a New Google Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Launching an Installed Google Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Samsung Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VPN Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

269
271
274
275
276
277
277
278
278
280
282
284
285
287
287
288
289
290
290

Section 9: Connections .....................................................293
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable Downloading for Web Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

293
307
314
315
317

Section 10: Changing Your Settings ................................321
Accessing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wi-Fi Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Home Screen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

321
321
327
329
330
337
346

Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SD Card & Device Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Saving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language and Input Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back up and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motion Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessibility Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Developer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

347
351
354
356
357
358
360
361
371
373
383
385
386
389
390
391
393
397
398

Section 11: Health and Safety Information ......................400
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information . . . . . . .
FCC Part 15 Information to User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UL Certified Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS & AGPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

400
407
410
411
411
413
415
417
417
418
420
421
422

Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for
Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Notice and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End User License Agreement for Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

425
428
431
431
432
433

Index ..................................................................................444

Section 1: Getting Started
This section explains how to get started with your phone by installing
and charging the battery, installing the micro SIM card and optional
memory card, and setting up your voicemail.
Before using your device for the first time, you’ll need to install and
charge the battery and install the micro SIM card.
The micro SIM card is loaded with your subscription details, such as
your PIN, available optional services, and many other features. If
desired, you can also install an SD card to store media for use with
your phone.
Important! microSIM card support is dependant on your service
provider.

Understanding this User Manual
The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your
phone.
Also included is important safety information that you should know
before using your phone. This information is available near the back
of the online user manual.
This manual provides navigation instructions according to the default
display settings. If you select other settings, navigation may be
different.
Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual assume
you are starting from the Home screen and using the available keys.

Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings, and
may vary from your device, depending on the software version
on your device, and any changes to the device’s Settings.
Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual start
with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.
All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual displays
may vary, depending on the software version of your device and
any changes to the device’s Settings.

Special Text
Throughout this manual, you’ll find text that is set apart from the
rest. These are intended to point out important information, share
quick methods for activating features, to define terms, and more.
The definitions for these methods are as follows:
• Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu, or submenu.

• Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods, or useful shortcuts.
• Important: Points out important information about the current feature that
could affect performance.

• Warning: Brings to your attention important information to prevent loss of
data or functionality, or even prevent damage to your phone.

Getting Started

Text Conventions
This manual provides condensed information about how to use your
phone. To make this possible, the following text conventions are
used to represent often-used steps:
➔

Arrows are used to represent the sequence of
selecting successive options in longer, or
repetitive, procedures.

Example: From the Home screen, press
Bluetooth.

(Menu) ➔ Settings ➔

Battery Cover
The battery, micro SIM card and SD card are installed under the
battery cover.
Important! Before removing or replacing the battery cover, make sure
the device is switched off. To turn the device off, hold
down the
key until the power-off image displays,
then tap Power off.
Caution! Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively during
installation or removal. Doing so may damage the cover.

To remove the battery cover:
1. Hold the device firmly and locate the cover release latch.
2. Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly “pop” the cover
off the device (similar to a soda can).

Release Latch

To replace the battery cover:

Position the battery cover over the battery compartment and
press down until you hear a click.

Getting Started

Installing the microSD Memory Card
Your device supports an optional (external) microSD™ memory
cards for storage of media such as music, pictures, video and other
files. The SD card is designed for use with this mobile device and
other devices.
Note: microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 4GB.
microSDHC™ memory card types can range from 4GB to up to
32GB. microSDXC™ memory card types can include capacities
greater than 32GB.
Note: This device supports a memory card of up to a 64GB.
1. Remove the battery cover.
2. Locate the microSD card slot on the inside of the device.
3. Orient the card with the gold strips facing down.
4. Carefully slide the microSD card into the card socket until it
clicks into place.
Important! Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the
phone’s contact pins.

Correct

rd
SIM Ca

Incorrect

Removing the microSD Memory Card
1. Remove the battery cover.
2. Firmly press the card into the slot and release it. The card
should pop partially out of the slot.
3. Remove the card from the slot.
4. Replace the battery cover.

Battery
Before using your device for the first time, install the battery and
charge it fully.
Important! Before removing or replacing the battery, make sure the
device is switched off. To turn the device off, hold down
the
key until the power-off image displays, then
tap Power off.

Getting Started

Installing the Battery
1. Slide the battery into the compartment (1) so that the tabs on
the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone, making
sure the connectors align.
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).

Removing the Battery

Grip the battery at the top end (3) and lift it up and out of the
battery compartment (4).
Installing Battery
rd
SIM Ca

rd
SIM Ca

Removing Battery

Charging the Battery
Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. A wall
charger, which is used for charging the battery, is included with your
device. Use only approved batteries and chargers. Ask your local
Samsung dealer for further details.
Before using your device for the first time, you must fully charge the
battery. A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately 4
hours.

Charging Head

Correct

Incorrect

USB Cable

Note: Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the wall
charger. If both the wall charger is connected and the battery is
not installed, the handset will power cycle continuously and
prevent proper operation. Failure to unplug the wall charger
before you remove the battery, can cause the device to become
damaged.
Getting Started

Important! It is recommended you fully charge the battery before
using your device for the first time.
1. Connect the USB cable to the charging head.
2. Locate the Charger/Accessory jack.
3. Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/Accessory jack.
4. Plug the charging head into a standard AC power outlet. The
device turns on with the screen locked and indicates both its
charge state and percent of charge.
Warning! While the device is charging, if the touch screen does not
function due to an unstable power supply unplug the USB
power adapter from the power outlet or unplug the USB
cable from the device.

Incorrect

Correct

Note: This illustration displays both the correct and incorrect
orientation for connecting the charger. If the charger is
incorrectly connected, damage to the accessory port will occur
therefore voiding the phone’s warranty.
5. When charging is finished, first unplug the charger’s power
plug from the AC wall outlet, then disconnect the charger’s
connector from the phone.
Important! If your handset has a touch screen display, please note that
a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad
of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive
force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch
screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void
the warranty.

Low Battery Indicator
When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time
remain (~15% charge), a warning tone sounds and the
“Battery low” message repeats at regular intervals on the display. In
this condition, your device conserves its remaining battery power, by
dimming the backlight.
When the battery level becomes too low, the device automatically
turns off.
The on-screen battery charge is represented (by default) as a
colored battery icon. You can also choose to display a percentage
value. Having a percentage value on-screen can provide a better
idea of the remaining charge on the battery.
Getting Started

From the Home screen, press
and then tap Settings ➔
Display ➔ Display battery percentage.

For more information, refer to “Display Settings” on page 351.

Extending Your Battery Life

Active applications, light levels, Bluetooth usage, and GPS
functionality all act to drain your battery. The following is a list of
helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power:
• Reduce your backlight on time.

• Turn Bluetooth off when not in use.
• Turn Wi-Fi off when not in use.
• Deactivate the GPS when not needed. Most applications using this
function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your current location;
each query drains your battery.

• Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging your
device. Repeating this process of a complete discharge and recharge can
over time reduce the storage capacity of any battery.

• Turn off Automatic application sync.
• Use the Power Saving feature to deactivate some hardware and interface
functions.

• Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions have
been consuming your battery resources.

• Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary applications.

• Use the Task Manager feature to end/shutdown background applications
that are still running. These minimized applications can, over time, cause
your device to “slow down”.

• Turn off any streaming services after use (see Running Services).
• Animated wallpapers use processing power, memory, and more power.
Change your Live Wallpaper to a non-animated Wallpaper gallery or
Gallery image.

Initial Device Configuration
1. Select a language from the associated field. English is the
default language.
2. Tap Start.
3. At the Activate your phone screen, tap Activate to initiate the
activation process.
Note: You may be prompted with a notification that your activation is
completed.
4. At the Activate mobile data servcie screen, tap Activate to
initiate the data activation process.
5. If prompted, connect to an active Wi-Fi Access point.

Getting Started

6. At the Got Google? screen, choose either Yes to log into your
existing Google account or No to continue.
• If you selected Yes, on the Sign in screen, enter your current Google
Email and Password information and tap (
) Next.
• Tap OK to agree to the Google legal agreements.
• If prompted to enable purchases, tap Set up credit card and enter your
credit card information and click Save.
• Click Skip to continue without entering this information.
7. If you indicated that you did not have a current Google
account, then at the Make it Google screen, choose either Get
an account to create a new account or Not now to continue.
8. Select/deselect the desired Google location services and tap
(Next).
Note: Enabling Google location services can drain battery power.
9. If prompted, enter a First and Last name then tap

(Next).

This will help to identify this as your device.
10. Read the on-screen Google services disclaimer and then tap
(Next). This will help to identify this as your device.
11. Tap Finish to complete the setup process.
12. Go through the on-screen tutorial.

Switching the Device On or Off
Once the device has been configured, you will not be prompted with
setup screens again.
To turn the device on:

Press and hold
on.

(Power/End) until the device switches

The device searches for your network and after finding it, you
can make or receive calls.
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory. To
change the language, use the Language menu. For more
information, refer to “Language and Input Settings” on
page 373.
To turn the device off:
1. Press and hold
screen appears.
2. Tap Power off (

(Power/End) until the Device options
) ➔ OK.

Restarting the Device
1. Press and hold
screen appears.
2. Tap Restart (

(Power/End) until the Device options
) ➔ OK.

Getting Started

Locking and Unlocking the Device
By default, the device screen locks when the backlight turns off.

Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass in any of
the directions shown unlock the device.

Note: You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent
unauthorized use of your device. For more information, refer to
“Security” on page 371.

Creating a New Google Account
You should create a Google™ account when you first use your
device in order to fully utilize available functionality. This account
provides access to several device features such as Gmail™,
Google+™, Hangouts™, and Google Play™ Store applications.
Before you can access Google applications, you must enter your
account information. These applications sync between your device
and your online Google account.
To create a new Google Account from your device:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Play Store).
2. Read the introduction and tap New to begin.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a Google Account.
– or –
If this is not the first time you are starting the device,
tap
➔
(Gmail).
Note: If you already have a Google account, you only need to sign in.
22

Signing into Your Google Account
1. Launch an application that requires a Google account (such as
Play Store or Gmail).
2. Click Existing.
3. Tap the Email and Password fields and enter your information.
Choose to enable/disable the option to keep yourslef up to date
with news and offers, then tap OK.
4. Tap
(Next). Your device communicates with the Google
servers to confirm your information.
5. From the Backup and restore screen, you can enable the
option to stay up to date on news and offers, then tap
(Next).

Retrieving your Google Account Password
A Google account password is required for Google applications. If
you misplace or forget your Google Account password, follow these
instructions to retrieve it:
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser and navigate to
http://google.com/accounts.
2. Click on the Can’t access your account? link.
3. Follow the on-screen password recovery procedure.

Getting Started

Confirming the Default Image and Video
Storage Location
Although the device is configured to store new pictures and videos to
the Memory card, it is a very good idea to confirm this location
before using your device.
Important! Too many users can overlook this storage destination until
something goes wrong. It is recommended that you verify
this location or change it before initiating the use of the
camera or camcorder features.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. From the viewfinder screen, tap
to the Storage entry.

(Apps) ➔

(Camera).

(Settings) and scroll up

3. Tap this entry and select the desired default storage location
for newly taken pictures or videos. Choose from: Phone or
Memory card.
Note: It is recommended that you set the option to Memory card.
4. Press

to return to the Home screen.

Creating a Samsung Account
Just as important as setting up and activating a Google account to
help provide access to Play Store, etc.. An active Samsung account
is required to begin accessing applications such as Media Hub.
Note: The Samsung account application will manage your access to
the previously mentioned applications, and there is no longer a
need to remember different passwords for each application.
1. In a single motion, touch and drag the Status bar down to the
bottom of the screen to reveal the Notifications panel and tap
(Samsung account).
– or –
Press
➔
Samsung account.

and then tap Settings ➔ Add account ➔

2. If you have previously created a Samsung account, tap Sign in.
– or –
If this is your first time, tap Create new account.
3. Enter your the required information and tap Sign up.
4. Tap Terms and conditions and Privacy policy to read the legal
disclaimers and related information.
5. If you agree to the terms, place a green check mark in the I
accept all the terms above field and tap Agree.
6. Enter your the required information and tap Sign up.
Note: You may be prompted to confirm your credentials via email.
Getting Started

7. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to verify your
account via the provided email address.
Note: Without confirming your email address and following the
documented procedures, related applications will not function
properly since it is Samsung account that is managing their
username and password access.

Voicemail
Setting Up Your Voicemail
Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to
voicemail, even if your device is in use or turned off. As soon as your
battery is charged, activate your voicemail account.
Important! Always use a password to protect against unauthorized
access.
For new users, follow the instructions below to set up voicemail:
Note: Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network.
1. From the Home screen, tap
and then touch and hold the
key until the device dials voicemail.
You may be prompted to enter a password.
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, a greeting, and a
display name.

Accessing Your Voicemail
You can access your Voicemail by either pressing and holding
on the keypad, or by using the phone’s Application icon, then tapping
the Voicemail application. To access Voicemail using the menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap
and then touch and hold
until the device dials voicemail.
Note: Touching and holding
will launch Visual voicemail if it is
already active on your device.
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the voicemail
center.

Accessing Your Voicemail From Another Phone
1. Dial your wireless phone number.
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the asterisk key
on the phone you are using.
3. Enter your passcode.

Getting Started

Task Manager
Your device can run applications simultaneously, with some
applications running in the background.
Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over time, and the
biggest reason for this are background applications. These are
applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still
active but minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you see which
of these applications are still active in the background but also easily
lets you choose which applications are left running and which are
closed.
Note: The larger the number of applications running on your phone,
the larger the energy drain on your battery.

Task Manger Overview

Press and hold
(Home) and then tap
(Task manager). This screen contains the following tabs:
• Active applications display those currently active applications running
on your phone.
• Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications from the
Play Store that are taking up memory space. Tap Uninstall to remove
them from your phone.
• RAM, which displays the amount of current RAM (Random Access
Memory) currently being used and allow you to Clear Memory.
• Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used space
within the System storage and external SD card.

• Help provides additional battery saving and RAM management
techniques.

Shutting Down a Currently Active Application
1. Press and hold
(Task manager).

(Home) and then tap

2. From the Active applications tab, tap End to close selected
applications.
– or –
Tap End all to close all background running applications.

Google Now
Google Now® recognizes a users’ repeated actions performed on the
device (including access of common locations, repeated calendar
appointments, search queries, etc.). This information is then used to
display more relevant information to the user in the form of “cards”.
These scrollable on-screen cards are displayed when the Google
Now application is launched.
These cards are not manually added.
The service uses your GPS, Google Search, and usage information to
generate these cards automatically.
To initially set up Google Now:
1. Press and hold
(Home) and then tap

(Google Now).

2. Follow the on-screen instructions to review the available
information.
3. When prompted, agree to launch the application. Some initial
on-screen “cards” are shown. A default is the Weather card
that provides updated weather information in your area.
Getting Started

To configure the Google Now settings:
1. Press and hold
(Home) and then tap
2. Press

(Google Now).

and select Settings.

3. Access each desired Settings page and configure it as desired.
When these condition are met, new card information will begin to
appear in the Google Now list of cards.

Section 2: Understanding Your Device
This section outlines key features of your device. It also describes
the device’s keys, screen and the icons that display when the device
is in use.

Features of Your Device

Your device is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many significant
features. The following list outlines a few of the features included in
your device.
• Touch screen with virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard

• Delivering data speeds faster than the current 3G network technology.
Note: 4G network connection is dependent on your service provider.

• 4.8” HD Super AMOLED® screen (1280x720)
• Android 4.1.2, Jelly Bean Platform
• Smart Switch™ compliant. For more information, see
www.samsungsmartswitch.com

• Support for Gestures (Screen Shot, Quick pause, Quick Rotate, Tap to Top
of List, Missed Event Alert, and Camera Quick Access)

• Wi-Fi ® Capability
• Apps available to download from the Google Play™ Store
• AllShare® Play to share your media content across DLNA certified device.
AllShare Cloud connectivity enabled via the use of an external Web storage
service

• Group Play® screen sharing
Understanding Your Device

• Compliant with AllShare Cast Hub®
• 8 Megapixel Camera and Camcorder with autofocus and digital zoom
• 1.9 Megapixel Front Facing camera for Video Chat
• S-Beam and Android Beam file transfer technology
• Share Shot camera sharing-capable via multi-connect Wi-Fi Direct
connection

• Bluetooth enabled
• NFC-compatible
• Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube, Google
Maps, Google Voice Search)

• Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging, and Instant
Messaging with Windows Live Messenger, Hangouts™ and Yahoo!
Messenger

• Corporate and Personal Email
• Music Player with multitasking features
• Pre-loaded e-reader applications such as: Play Books™
• Assisted GPS (Google Navigation)
• Webkit-based browser
• Reader Mode can transform content-rich Web sites into easier to read
pages. Located within the browser, this feature allows users to convert
existing Web pages into a more accessibly readable source

• Expandable memory slot - supports up to 64GB microSD
• Video Chat via Hangouts
• Google Play™ Music
• Compatibility with a new micro SIM card
32

• Wi-Fi Calling via the use of a micro SIM card
• Access to thousands of Movies and TV Shows with the Samsung Media
Hub

• HD Video Player 1080p
– Codec: MPEG4, H.264, H.263, VC-1, WMV7/8, VP8, MP4/3GP
– Format: 3GP (MP4), WMV (ASF), AVI, and DivX

• Video Player support for PIP (Picture in Picture) viewing
• DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium
content

• Kies Air to wirelessly sync your PC with your phone via a Wi-Fi®
connection

• Contextual tags available within the Camera application
• Multi-WIndow functionality
• Pop-up Play (Picture in Picture) functionality available via the video player
• Starter mode functionality converts the current User Interface into larger
and easier to use format

Understanding Your Device

Front View
The following illustrations show the main elements of your device.
The following list correlates to the illustrations.
1. Headset jack allows you to connect a hands-free headset so
you can listen to music.
2. Indicator light illuminates with a series of distinct colors and
flashing patterns to indicate different notifications and
statuses. Events include Charging, Low battery, and Missed
event:
• Powering on - blue blinks/animates
• Battery Charging - red remains on
• Battery Fully Charged - green remains on.
• Low Battery or Charging Error- red blinks/animates
• Missed Notification (Call or Messaging) - blue blinks/animates
For more information, refer to “LED Indicator” on page 353.
3. Menu key displays a list of options available for the current
screen. From the Home screen it displays Add apps and
widgets, Create folder, Set wallpaper, Edit page, Search, and
Settings options.
4. Home key displays the Home screen when pressed. Press and
hold to display your recent apps, Task manager, and Remove
all option.
Double-press to activate S Voice.

6
10

2
9

3
7
4

5. USB Power/Accessory connector allows you to connect a power
cable or optional accessories such as a USB/data cable.
6. Microphone is used during phone calls and allows other callers
to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them. There are
two microphones on the device:
• Bottom microphone: used during handset mode.
Understanding Your Device

• Top microphone: used while an active call is in the speakerphone mode
and assists in noise cancellation (2 microphone solution).
7. Back key redisplays the previous screen or clears entries.
8. Display shows all the information needed to operate your
phone, such as the connection status, received signal
strength, phone battery level, and time.
9. Front Facing Camera allows you to take pictures while facing
the screen and allows you to video conference.
10. Proximity Sensor detects how close an object is to the surface
of the screen. This is typically used to detect when your face is
pressed up against the screen, such as during a phone call.
• While talking on the phone, the sensor detects talk activity and locks the
keypad to prevent accidental key presses.
11. Light Sensor lets you use the ambient light level to adjust the
screen brightness/contrast. This sensor decreases screen
brightness in dim light.
• In a bright light condition (outdoors), the sensors cause the device to
increase the brightness and contrast for better viewing.
• In dim light conditions, the device decreases the screen brightness to
compensate.
12. Receiver allows you to hear the other caller and the different
ring tones or sounds offered by your phone.

Back View
The following illustration shows the external elements of your
Device:
1. microSD Card Slot (internal) allows you use a microSD card to
expand the memory of your device.
2. micro SIM Card Slot (internal) Installation location for SIM card.
1

3. External speaker allows you to hear ringers, music, and other
sounds offered by your phone.
4. Camera lens is used to take photos.
5. Flash is used to take photos in low-light conditions.

Understanding Your Device

Side Views
The following illustration shows the side elements of your device:

2
1

1. Volume key allows you to adjust the ringer volume in standby
mode (with the phone open) or adjust the voice volume during
a call. When receiving an incoming call:
• Pressing the volume key down mutes the ring tone.
2. Power/End key
ends a call or switches the phone off
and on. Press and hold for two seconds to turn toggle the
Silent mode or Airplane mode states, turn the device on or off,
or Restart.

Device Display
Your display provides information about the device’s status, and is
the interface to manage features. The display indicates your
connection status, signal strength, battery status and time. Icons
display at the top of the device when an incoming call or message is
received and also alerts you at a specified time when an alarm was
set. The screen also displays notifications, and Application (or
shortcut) bar with five primary shortcuts: Phone, Contacts,
Messaging, Internet, and Apps.

Display settings
In this menu, you can change various settings for the for the
wallpaper, cube, brightness or backlight.

From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Settings) ➔

Display. For more information, refer to “Display Settings” on
page 351.

Status Bar
The Status Bar shows information about the connection status,
signal strength, phone battery level, and time, and displays
notifications about incoming messages, calls and other actions.
This list identifies the icons you see on your phone’s display screen:

Understanding Your Device

Indicator Icons
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your device’s display and
Indicator area:
Note: Some Notification icons can be hidden manually by toggling the
status of the Notification panel function. For more information,
refer to “Accessing Additional Screen Functions” on page 48.

Displays your current signal strength. The greater the
number of bars, the stronger the signal.
Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You cannot send
or receive any calls or access online information.
Indicates there is no signal available.
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.
Displays when a call is in progress. Icon is displayed in the
Status bar area.
Displays when a call is on hold. Icon is displayed in the
Status bar area.
Displays when an active call is routed through a Bluetooth
headset. Icon is displayed in the Status bar area.
Displays when you have missed an incoming call.

Displays when you device is set to automatically
reject calls from your Reject list or all calls.
Displays when the speakerphone is on. Icon is displayed
in the Status bar area.
Displays when the microphone is muted. Icon is displayed
in the Status bar area.
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always forward.
Displayed in the Status bar when the current call is
minimized. For more information, refer to “Configuring
Additional Voice Call Settings” on page 343.
Displays your current battery charge level. Icon shown
is fully charged.
100%

Displays when the current battery is 100 percent
charged and the Display battery percentage option is
enabled within the Settings ➔ Display menu.
Displays your battery is currently charging.
Displays your current battery charge level is low
(Charge: ~28% - 15%).
Displays your current battery charge level is very low
(Charge: ~15% - 5%).
Shows your current battery only has up to 4% power
remaining and will soon shutdown. (Charge: ~4% - 1%).

Displays when connected to the 1X network.

Understanding Your Device

Displays when your phone is communicating with
the 1X network.
Displays when connected to the 3G network. 3G indicator
is only seen when roaming.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the 3G network. 3G indicator is only seen when roaming.
Displays when the phone has detected an active USB
connection and is in a USB Debugging mode.
Displays when there is a new text message.
Displays when an outgoing text message has failed to
be delivered.
Displays when there is a new voicemail message.
Displays in the notifications window when there is
a new Email message.
Displays in the notifications window when there is
a new Gmail message.
Displays when a new Google+ notification has
been received.
Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event has
arrived. For more information, refer to “Calendar” on
page 250.

Displays when an alarm is set.
For more information, refer to “Setting an Alarm” on
page 254.
Displays when the device is in Silent mode.
All sounds except media and alarms are silenced, and
Silent mode is set to Vibrate. For more information, refer to
“Silent mode via Device Options Screen” on page 347.
Displays when the device is in Silent mode.
All sounds are silenced, and Silent mode is set to Mute.
Displays when data synchronization and application
sync is active and synchronization is in progress for
Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.
Displays when the Blocking mode feature is active.
Displays when Bluetooth technology is active
and enabled.
Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active
and communicating with an external device.
Displays when the an outbound file transfer is
in progress.
Displays when a file or application download is
in progress.
Displays when a file is being uploaded or sync’d between
your device and an external Web storage location.

Understanding Your Device

Displays when the uploaded or transferred file was
successfully delivered.
Displays when the Share shot option is enabled from within
the Camera Shooting mode menu and images and being
shared via Wi-Fi Direct.
Displays when a screen capture has been taken and stored
in the clipboard.
For more information, refer to “Using Gestures” on
page 58.
Displays when your device is connected being
used to control streaming media and is connected to a
Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA)
certified device using the Samsung Link application.
Displays when your device is currently sharing/streaming
media to paired device using the Samsung Link
application.
Displays when AllShare Cast Hub is active, connected to
your device, and communicating.
Displays when Hangout updates are available for
download.
Displays when updates are available for download.
Displays when a Play Store download has completed.
44

Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an
available open wireless network.
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and configured
for a direct connection to another compatible device
in the same direct communication mode.
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is communicating
with another compatible device.
Displays when a share shot has been established with
other users via a Wi-Fi Direct connection.
Displays when you are currently in Emergency calling
mode. You must exit this mode to resume normal
calling function.
Displays in the notifications window when action is
required within the Samsung account application.
Displays in the notifications window when there are
too many on-screen notification icons to display.
Tap to show more notifications.
Tap to select a text input method.
Displays in the notifications window when a song is
currently playing within the Music Player.
Displays in the notifications window when a song is
currently playing within the Play Music application.
Understanding Your Device

Displays when your device’s GPS is on and
communicating.
Displays when the external SD card (internal
microSD) has been disconnected (unmounted) from the
phone and is now ready for either removal or formatting.
Displays when the External SD card is being prepared
for mounting to the device. This is required for
communication with the External SD card.
Displays when the microSD card has been
improperly removed or unexpectedly.
Displays when Power saving mode is enabled.
Displays when the Power saving alert notification has been
activated. You are then prompted to view your current
battery level.
Displays when TTY device has been inserted.

For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see “Changing
Your Settings” on page 321.

Notification Bar
The Notification area indicates new message events (data sync
status, new messages, calendar events, call status, etc). You can
expand this area to display the Notification screen that provides
more detailed information about the current on-screen notification
icons.
1. Touch the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
Notifications screen (1).
2. Tap a notification entry to open the associated
application (2).

Understanding Your Device

Clearing Notifications
1. In a single motion, touch and drag the Status bar down to the
bottom of the screen to open the Notifications screen.
2. Tap Clear. The notifications are cleared from the panel.

Accessing Additional Screen Functions
In addition to notifications, this screen also provides quick and ready
access to separate device functions. These can be quickly activated
or deactivated by toggling them on or off.

The following functions can either be activated (green) or
deactivated (gray): Wi-Fi, GPS, Sound/Vibrate/Mute, Screen rotation,
Bluetooth, Mobile data, Blocking mode, Power saving, Multi window,
and Sync.

Function Keys
Your device comes equipped with three main function keys that can
be used on any screen: Home, Menu, and Back.

Home Key
The Home key (
) takes you back to your Home screen
(#4 of the 7 available screens).

Press and hold to launch the Recent apps/Task manager
screen. For more information, refer to “Accessing RecentlyUsed Applications” on page 70.

Menu Key
The Menu key (
) activates an available menu function for the
current screen or application.

Back Key
The Back key (
) returns you to the previously active screen. If the
on-screen keyboard is currently open, this key closes the keyboard.

Understanding Your Device

Home Screen
The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications on
your phone. There are initially seven available panels, each
populated with default shortcuts or applications. You can customize
each of these panels.
Connection Status

Signal strength
Battery status

Status Bar
Time
Notification
area
Status
area

Home Screen
Google search

Shortcuts

Primary
Shortcuts

• Notification area displays those icons associated with end-user
notifications such as: email messages, calls (missed, call in progress),
new voicemail, upcoming event, USB connection, Emails, and Text/MMS
messages.

– These notifications appear at the top-left of the screen (within the
Status bar area) and display important user information.

– This information can be accessed by swiping down from the Status bar
(page 47).

• Status area displays those icons associated with the status of the device
such as communication, coverage, Bluetooth, 4G/3G,
Wi-Fi communication, battery levels, GPS, etc.

• Home Screen is a customizable screen that provides information about
notifications and device status, and allows access to application Widgets.

• Extended Home Screens extend beyond the current visible screen width
to provide more space for adding icons, widgets, and other customization
features.
– There are six available extended screens (panels) each of which may be
populated with its own shortcuts or widgets. These screens share the
use of the five Primary Shortcuts.
– The current screen is indicated at the bottom by a white square. Up to
seven (7) total screens are available.
Note: Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all
screens.

• Google search is an on-screen Internet search engine powered by
Google™. Tap to access the Voice Actions feature where you can verbally
enter a search term and initiate an online search.

– Tap

(Voice Actions) to launch the function from within this
Google widget.
• Widgets are self-contained on-screen applications (not shortcuts). These
can be placed onto any of the available screens (Home or extended).
Understanding Your Device

• Shortcuts are icons that launch available device applications such as
Camera, YouTube, Contacts, Phone, Email, Play Store, etc. These function
the same as shortcuts on your computer.
– Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens,
the majority can also be found within the Applications screens.
– The Application screens can be accessed by tapping
(Apps) from
the Primary shortcuts area.
– Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number
of times.
• Primary Shortcuts: are four shortcuts present throughout all of the
available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device or
launch any of the following functions:
– Phone (
) launches the phone-related screen functions (Keypad,
Logs, Favorites, and Contacts).

– Contacts (

) launches the Contacts-related screens (Phone,

Groups, Favorites, and Contacts).

– Messaging (

) launches the Messaging menu (create new

messages or open an existing message string).

– Internet (
) launches the built-in Web browser.
– Apps toggles functionality between the Home and Application screens.
• Tap
(Apps) to access the Application screens loaded with every
available local application.
• While in the Applications screens, tap
Home screen.

(Back) to easily return to the

As you transition from screen to screen, a screen indicator (located
at the bottom) displays the currently active panel.
52

Home Screen Menu Settings
When on the Home screen, press
to reveal the following menu
options:
• Add apps and widgets allows you to quickly access the Widget tab
where you can then drag a selected widget to an available area on a
selected screen.

• Create folder allows you to create on-screen folders to help organize files
of application shortcuts.

• Set wallpaper allows you to assign the current wallpaper for the Home
screen, Lock screen, or Home screen and lock screens. Choose from
Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpapers.

• Edit page allows you to add or remove extended screens from your
device. You can have up to six extended screens (one Home screen and six
Extended screens).

• Search displays the Google Search box that you can use to search for a
key term online.

• Settings provides quick access to the device’s settings menu.
– The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing
and then
tapping

➔ Settings.

Understanding Your Device

Applications
The Application menu provides quick access to the most frequently
used applications. Applications display on each of the three panels
on the Applications screens.
Important! Once you log into your Google account. All previously
downloaded apps should now be populated within the
Application screens.

Application Screen Menu Settings
When on the Apps screen, the following menu options are available:
(Apps).
1. From the Home screen, tap
and then select from the following options:
2. Press
• Play Store: provides quick access to the Play Store (page 278).
• Edit: allows you to add a new folder to the Application screen and then
drag/drop an existing application into it. This feature requires the view be
set to Customizable view.
• Create folder: allows you to create an application folder where you can
better organize and group desired apps.
• Uninstall: allows you to uninstall a user-downloaded application. Only
those applications that are not default to the device can be downloaded.
Tap
to remove the selected app.
• Downloaded applications: allows you to filter the view of apps to only
those applications that you have downloaded.
• View type: allows you to customize the way the Apps menu listing is
shown (page 75).
54

• Share apps: allows you to share information about selected applications
with external users (page 73).
• Hide applications: allows you to specify which current applications are
hidden from view in this menu. Once you have selected the apps, tap
Done.
• Show hidden applications: allows you to specify which previously
hidden applications are can be made visible again for viewing in this
menu. Once you have selected the apps, tap Done.
3. Press

to return to the Home screen.

Important! For help closing any or all current applications, use the
Task manager. For more information, refer to “Task
Manager” on page 28.

Screen Navigation
Using the touch screen display and the keys, you can navigate the
features of your device and enter characters. The following
conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation
action in the procedures.

Navigating Through the Screens
The following terms describe the most common hardware and onscreen actions.
• Press and hold: Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and buttons
to select or activate an item. For example: press the Navigation key to
scroll through a menu. Some buttons and keys require you to press and
hold them to activate a feature, for example, you press the Power/End key
to lock and unlock the phone.
Understanding Your Device

• Tap: Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on the
virtual QWERTY keyboard. For example: touch an Application icon to open
the application. A light touch works best.

• Touch and hold: Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available
options, or to access a pop-up menu. For example: touch and hold from
the Home screen to access a menu of customization options.

• Flick: Move your finger in lighter, quicker strokes than swiping. This finger
gesture is always used in a vertical motion, such as when flicking through
contacts or a message list.

• Swipe or slide: Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally across
the screen. This allows you to move the area of focus or to scroll through a
list. For example: slide your finger left or right on the Home screen to scroll
among the seven panels.

• Drag: Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start to
move it. Do not release your finger until you have reached the target
position.

• Rotate: Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to
landscape by turning the device sideways. For example: rotate to
landscape orientation when entering text, to provide a larger keyboard, or
when viewing web content to minimize scrolling.

• Pinch: “Pinch” the screen using your thumb and
forefinger to zoom out when viewing a picture or
a Web page. (Move fingers inward to zoom out.)

• Spread: “Spread” the screen using your thumb
and forefinger to zoom in when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move
fingers outward to zoom in.)
56

Note: These screens can be re-arranged in any desired order. For
more information, refer to “Customizing the Screens” on
page 71.

• Motion Navigation and Activation: The device comes equipped with the
ability to assign specific functions to certain device actions that are
detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope.
Note: Motion must be enabled for this feature to be active. For more
information, refer to “Motion Settings” on page 386.

Accessing Recently-Used Apps
1. Press and hold
from any screen to open the
recently-used applications window.
2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.
– or –
Tap

to go to the Task manager.

– or –
Tap

to go to Google Search.

– or –
Tap

to delete the record of all recently used applications.

Understanding Your Device

Using Gestures
By activating the various gesture features within the Motion menu
(page 386), you can access a variety of time saving functions.
To activate motion:
1. From the main Settings page, tap Motion.
2. Activate the feature by touching and sliding the Motion
activation slider to the right to turn it on.
3. Tap the desired on-screen motion option.
The following is a description some of the most commonly
used gestures:
• Direct call: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently displayed onscreen Contact entry as soon as you place the device to your ear.

• Smart alert: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and notified of
you have missed any calls or messages.

• Double tap to top: Once enabled, double tap the top of the device to be
taken to the top of the current on-screen list.

• Tilt to zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where content can
be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points on the display
then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out.

• Pan to move icon: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired application
shortcut icon or widget on the screen. Once it detaches, move the device
left or right to migrate it to a new location.

• Pan to browse images Once enabled, touch and hold a desired onscreen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right to pan
vertically or up and down to pan horizontally around the large on-screen
image.
58

• Shake to update: Once enabled, shake your device to rescan for
Bluetooth devices, rescan for Wi-Fi devices, Refresh a Web page, etc..

• Turn over to mute/pause: Once enabled, mute incoming calls and any
playing sounds by turning the device display down on a surface. This is
the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified Gesture.

• Sensitivity setting and tutorial: provides access to advanced gesture
settings and tutorials such as:
• Sensitivity settings: When any of the following features are enabled,
you can then adjust their sensitivity.
Choose from: Gyroscope calibration, Tilt to zoom, Pan to move icon, and
Pan to browse images.
• Learn about motions: tap an on-screen entry to display a brief tutorial
on the use of the selected function.
Note: Sensitivity settings are only accessible if the gesture is currently
active.

Understanding Your Device

Palm Swipe to
Screen Capture

• Palm touch to mute/pause: Once enabled, you can pause any
on-screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen
with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the screen, the device
goes back to normal by either continuing to play the current video or
unmuting the current sound.

• Learn about hand motions: Provides you with on-screen tutorials about
selected motions such as: Palm swipe to capture and Palm touch to mute/
pause.

Gyroscope Calibration
Calibrate your device by using the built-in gyroscope.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Motion ➔ Sensitivity settings
➔ Gyroscope calibration.
2. Place the device on a level surface and tap Calibrate. The
device adjusts the level of the accelerometer. During the
calibration process a green circle appears on-screen and the
center circle adjusts to the center position.
60

Using the Multi Window
This feature allows you to run multiple applications on the current
screen at the same time.
Note: Only applications found within the Multi window panel can be
active atop another current application on the screen.
When launching applications that contain multimedia files
(music/video), audio from both files will be played
simultaneously.

Activating and Deactivating Multi window
To activate Multi window via the Notification screen:
1. In a single motion, touch the Status bar to reveal the
Notifications tab, and then drag it to the bottom of the screen
to open the Notifications screen (1).
2. Swipe the row of icons to the left until the Multi window icon is
displayed.
3. Tap the Multi window entry to activate the feature (2). The icon
turns green when active.

Understanding Your Device

To activate Multi window via the Back button:
1. Press and hold the Back key (
). The Multi window tab
appears (by default) on the left side of the screen.
Note: Initially open activation, the entire apps panel is briefly
displayed, then minimized to only show the tab.
2. Tap the tab to open the application panel showing all the
available Multi window apps.
To deactivate Multi window:

Press and hold the Back key (
window tab from view.

). This action hides the Multi

Repositioning the Multi Window
The Multi window contains two components: tab and apps panel.
The tab can be manually moved across the screen. The apps panel
(containing the scrollable apps) can be relocated to lock onto the
different sides of the screen (top/bottom/left/right).
To move the tab:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. In a single motion, touch and hold the tab
for
approximately one-second, then slowly drag it to its new
location along the current screen edge.
Note: This is a quick way to get the tab out of the way if you can’t get
to a button or option behind it.
To relocate the Multi window apps panel:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the scrollable
apps).
Note: Notice that when the apps are visible, the tab turns a dark grey.
Its only in this state that the entire panel can be relocated.

Understanding Your Device

3. In a single motion, touch and hold the grey tab
for
approximately one-second to detach it from the screen (1),
then slowly drag it to its new location along any other available
screen edge (2).

Customizing the Multi Window apps
The applications found within the apps panel of the Multi window
can be organized by either being rearranged or removed.
To rearrange the Multi window applications:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the scrollable
apps).
3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it
detaches from the panel, then carefully drag it to a new
location in the list of apps. Lift your finger or stylus off the
screen to let go of the app and drop it into its new location.
64

To remove a Multi window application:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the scrollable
apps).
3. Tap the Edit button (located at the bottom of the list) to reveal a
staging area that can house any removed applications from the
Multi window panel.
4. Tap Done once you have completed the removal process.
To restore a Multi window application:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the scrollable
apps).
3. Tap the Edit button (located at the bottom of the list) to reveal
the staging area containing any previously removed apps.
4. Locate the desired application.
5. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it
detaches from the staging area, then carefully drag it to a new
location in the current list of apps.

Understanding Your Device

Using Multi Window to run multiple apps on the same
screen
Any of the apps found within the Multi window panel can be run at
the same time as a current on-screen app.
Once multiple apps are running on the same screen, you can then
choose to either swap their positions or maximize a desired app.
Note: Only applications found within the Multi-window panel can be
active atop another current application on the screen.
When launching applications that contain multimedia files
(music/video), audio from both files will be played
simultaneously.
In this example we will be launching both the Internet and Maps
applications.
1. Launch an application.
• From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Internet).
2. Activate the Multi window feature.
3. Tap the tab to display the apps panel.
4. Touch and hold the desired app, such as Maps, until it
detaches from the panel.
5. In a single motion, drag it over the current app and drop the
new Multi window app over either the top or bottom area of the
current on-screen app.

Note: Once two applications are running, the device displays a split
screen view containing both the initial app and the new Multi
window app. Each application is still independent of the other.
To switch the arrangement of the applications:
1. With the two applications
App #1
shown in a split screen, tap the
Border bar to show the
on-screen icons.

Split/Maximize

2. Tap the desired application
area (top or bottom).
3. Locate and tap
(Switch
app location). The current apps
are switched.
To increase the size of a desired
application window:
1. With the two applications
shown in a split screen, locate
the Border bar indicating the
edge of the app window.
2. In a single motion, touch and
hold the Border bar then drag it
to resize the desired window.

App #2 Border
bar

Understanding Your Device

Switch
Positions

To split the current applications:
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap the
Border bar to show the on-screen icons.
2. Tap the desired application area (top or bottom).
3. Locate and tap
(Maximize the app). The current apps are
the both maximized.

Menu Navigation
You can tailor the device’s range of functions to fit your needs using
both menus and applications. Menus, sub-menus, and features are
accessed by scrolling through the available on-screen menus. Your
device defaults with seven screens.

Navigating Through the Application Menus
There are three default Application Menu screens available. As you
add more applications from the Play Store, more screens are created
to house these new apps.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps). The first Application
Menu screen displays.
• To close the Applications screen, press
(Home).
2. Sweep the screen to access the other menus.
3. Tap any of the on-screen icons to launch the associated
application.

Using Sub-Menus
Sub-menus are available from within most screen and applications.
1. Press
. A sub-menu displays at the bottom of the screen.
2. Tap an available on-screen option.

Sub-Menu items

Understanding Your Device

Using Context Menus
Context menus (also called pop-up menus) contain options that
apply to a specific item on the screen. They function similarly to
menu options that appear when you right click your mouse on your
desktop computer.

Touch and hold an item on-screen to open its context menu.

Context
Menu

Accessing Recently-Used Applications
1. Press and hold
window.

to open the recently-used applications

Note: This recent applications screen also provides access to the Task
manager.
2. A pop-up displays the six most recently used applications.
3. Tap an icon to open the recent application.
70

Customizing the Screens
You can customize the Home screens (panels) to display the Widgets,
Shortcuts, Folders, or Wallpapers. For example, one screen could
contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms of media, while
another screen might contain communication apps such as Gmail.
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:

• Adding, Deleting, and Rearranging screens
• Assigning a New Home screen
• Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
• Sharing Application Information
• Managing Shortcuts
• Adding and Removing Widgets
• Changing the Background (Wallpapers)
Adding and Deleting Screens
Your phone comes with seven screens. You can delete these screens
and then add them back later.
Note: These screens can be deleted and re-arranged.
Important! Your phone can only contain at most seven screens and at
least one screen.

Understanding Your Device

To delete a screen:
1. From the Home screen, press
Edit page.

and then tap

2. Touch and hold, then drag the undesired screen down to the
Remove tab (
).
3. Press

to return to the main Home screen.

To add a screen:
1. From the Home screen, press

and then tap Edit page.

(Add screen). The newly added screen appears as
2. Tap
the last page.
3. Press

to return to the main Home screen.

Rearranging the Screens
1. From the Home screen, press
Edit page.

and then tap

2. Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new location.
Upper-left is screen position #1 and bottom-right is screen last
screen.

Assigning a New Home Screen
1. From the Home screen, press
Edit page.

and then tap

2. Tap
. The new Home screen then indicates this
(Home screen) icon at the top of the selected screen.

Sharing an App
The device’s Applications menu now comes with a feature that
allows you to share information about your selected applications
with external users.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps).
2. Press

and then tap Share apps.

3. Place a check mark alongside those applications you wish to
share information about and tap Done.
Note: Shared applications consist of those that have previously been
downloaded from the Play Store.
4. Select a sharing method. Choose from: Bluetooth, Email,
Gmail, Google, Google+, Hangouts, Messaging, S Memo, and
Wi-Fi Direct.
5. The recipient will be notified about the receipt of the new
information.

Managing Shortcuts
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, you must
carefully touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the
edge of the screen. As the shortcut turns light blue, you can
begin to move it to the adjacent screen.If this does not work,
delete it from its current screen. Activate the new screen and
then add the selected shortcut.

Understanding Your Device

To add a shortcut from the Applications screen:
1. Press
to go to the Home screen.
2. Select a screen location for your new shortcut by scrolling
across your available screens until you reach the desired one.
) to reveal all your current available
3. Tap Apps (
applications. By default, applications are displayed as an
Alphabetical grid.
4. Scroll across the screens and locate your desired application.
5. Touch and hold the on-screen icon. The new shortcut then
appears to hover over the current screen.
6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the current
screen. Once complete, release the screen to lock the shortcut
into its new position.
To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen:
1. Press
to go to the Home screen.
2. Navigate to a screen with an empty area.
3. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.
4. From the Home screen window, tap Apps and widgets ➔ Apps.
5. Scroll across the pages and tap a selection.
To delete a shortcut:
1. Press
to go to the Home screen.
2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it from its
location on the current screen.
3. Drag the shortcut over the Remove tab (

) and release it.

Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
Note: You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the
exception of the Apps shortcut.
To remove a primary shortcut:
1. Press
to go to the Home screen.
2. Touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to replace, then
drag it to an empty space on any available screen. The primary
shortcuts are now updated to show an empty slot.
To insert a new primary shortcut:
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Apps).

2. Locate your desired application, then touch and hold the onscreen icon to position it on a desired screen. For more
information, refer to “Managing Shortcuts” on page 73.
3. Locate the screen with the desired shortcut you want to add as
the new primary shortcut.
4. Touch and hold the shortcut until it detaches from the screen.
5. In a single motion, touch and hold the new shortcut, then drag
it to the empty space in the row of primary shortcuts. The new
primary shortcut will now appear on both the Home and
Extended screens.

Understanding Your Device

Adding and Removing Widgets
Widgets are self-contained applications that can be placed on any
screen. Unlike shortcuts, widgets appear as applications.
To add a Widget:
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔ Widgets tab.

2. Scroll across the Widget pages and locate a desired Widget.
3. Touch and hold an available Widget until it detaches from the
screen.
4. While still holding the Widget, scroll left or right across the
available screens and let go of the Widget to place it on your
current screen.
To remove a Widget:
1. Touch and hold a Widget until it unlocks from the current
screen.
) and release it.
2. Drag the widget over the Remove tab (
• As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn red.
• This action doesn’t delete the Widget, it just removes it from the current
screen.
To place a widget onto a different screen:
1. Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent.
2. Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until the adjacent
page appears highlighted and it then snaps onto the new page.
3. Drag the widget to its desired position on the new screen.
4. Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other screens.

Managing Wallpapers
Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images (user taken), Live
wallpapers (animated backgrounds), or Wallpaper gallery (default
phone wallpapers).
Note: Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional
battery power.
To change the current Home screen wallpaper:
1. Navigate to any screen.
– or –
Press

to go to the Home screen.

2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.
3. From the Home screen window tap Set wallpaper ➔ Home
screen.
4. Select a Wallpaper type:
• Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image
gallery, crop the image, and tap Done.
• Tap Live wallpapers to select from a list of animated backgrounds,
once done tap Set wallpaper.
• Tap Wallpapers, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper image, then
tap Set wallpaper.
Note: Wallpapers supports the following image types: JPEG, PNG, GIF,
BMP, and WBMP.

Understanding Your Device

To change Wallpapers from Settings Menu:
1. From the main Settings page, tap Display ➔ Wallpaper.
2. Access an available option. Choose from Home screen, Lock
screen, or Home and lock screens.
Note: The Home and lock screens is an additional option that allows
you to change both screens at the same time.
3. Select a wallpaper type (Gallery, Live wallpaper, or Wallpapers).
4. Choose an image and tap Done or Set wallpaper.
To change the current Lock screen wallpaper:
1. Navigate to any screen, touch and hold an empty area of the
screen, and tap Set wallpaper ➔ Lock screen.
– or –
From the main Settings page, tap Display ➔ Wallpaper ➔ Lock
screen.
2. Select a Wallpaper type:
• Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image
gallery, crop the image, and tap Done.
• Tap Wallpaper, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper image, then
tap Set wallpaper.

Section 3: Call Functions and Contacts
List
This section describes features and functionality associated with
making or answering calls, and the Contacts list, which is used to
store contact information.

Displaying Your Phone Number

From the Home screen, press
and then tap Settings ➔
About device ➔ Status. Your phone number displays in the
My phone number field.

Note: The device’s Settings menu can also be activated by pressing
and then tapping
(Apps) ➔
(Settings).

Making a Call
You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the SIM card
or to the device’s memory. These entries are referred to as the
Contacts list.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone).
2. Enter the phone number and then tap

If you make a mistake while dialing, tap
to clear the last
digit. Touch and hold
to clear the entire sequence.

Note: If your screen goes black during your interaction with the device
(Launching Keypad, etc.), you might be accidentally swiping
over the front sensors.
Call Functions and Contacts List

Quick Dialing a Number from the Contacts List
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Contacts).

2. Locate a contact from the list.
3. In a single motion, touch and drag your finger over the number
by going to the right. This action places a call to the recipient.

Quick
Calling
Quick
Texting

Running a Call in the Background
If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home screen, you
are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the green
phone icon within the Status bar.
This is the best way to stay on your current call and do something
else (multi-task) such as access the Contacts list, view a recent
email, locate a picture, etc..
In Call Notification

Ending a Call

Briefly tap

End call

key to end the call.

Note: To redial a recent number, tap
at the end of the call or
locate the number from the Logs list, tap the entry and tap Call.

Ending a Call from the Status Bar
1. From an active call, you can launch a separate application or
return to the Home screen. The current call is kept active in the
background.
2. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
Notifications panel.
3. Tap End (End) to end the currently active call.
Call Functions and Contacts List

Making Emergency Calls
If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn on the
phone, the Insert SIM card to make calls message displays and an
animated tutorial shows you how to install the SIM card.
Without a SIM card, you can only make an emergency call with the
phone; normal cell phone service is not available.
Making an Emergency Call Without a SIM card installed
1. Tap Emergency call from the on-screen display to make an
emergency call.
2. Enter 9-1-1 and tap
. Complete your call. During this
type of call, you will have access to the Speaker mode,
Keypad, and End Call features.
Note: Selecting Location consent may drain battery power. For more
information, refer to “Power Saving Mode” on page 356.
3. Tap

End call

to exit this calling mode.

Making an Emergency Call With a SIM card installed
The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency number
a 1-tap process. Before you can resume normal calling operations,
you should first exit this mode.
1. Swipe the Lock screen to unlock the device.
2. From the Home screen, tap

3. Enter the emergency number (ex: 911) and then tap

4. Complete your call. During this type of call, you will have
access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End Call features.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit the mode.

Dialing Options
When you enter numbers on the Keypad, you will see three
on-screen options.
From the keypad screen, use one of the following options:

• Voicemail (
• Call (
• Delete (

) to access your Voicemail service.
) to call the entered number.
) to delete digits from the current number.

Call Functions and Contacts List

To view additional dialing options:

Tap
:
• Send message to send the current caller a text message while still
maintaining the current call active.
• Add to Contacts to add the current number to either a new or existing
Contacts entry.
• Speed dial setting to access the Speed Dialing menu where you can
assign a speed dial location to a current Contacts entry.
• Add 2 sec pause to insert a two-second pause to enter a
2-second delay within a number string (the phone continues dialing after
2 seconds without any additional keys being pressed.
• Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string (the phone
waits for your input). A wait requires that any consecutive numbers be
manually sent by tapping Yes.
• Call settings to provide you access to the Call settings screen.

Answering a Call
When somebody calls you, the phone rings and displays the
incoming call image. The caller's phone number, picture, or name if
stored in Contacts List, displays.

At the incoming call screen:
• Touch and slide

to answer the call.

• Touch and slide

to reject the call.

• Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and tap a
predefined rejection message or tap Create new message to create a
new custom outgoing response.
84

Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer.
If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts, the
entry’s name is displayed. You may also see the caller’s phone
number, if available.

Touch and drag
upward to reject
with a message
Touch and
slide in any
direction to
answer the
call

Touch and slide
in any direction
to reject the call

Managing Reject Calls
This feature allows you to categorize both known and unknown
callers as rejected contacts. These Contacts are then added to you
Rejection list which can be managed for individual entries from
within the Contacts list or as a whole from the Call rejection screen.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone).
2. Press

and then tap Call settings page, tap Call restriction.

3. In a single motion touch and slide OFF
to the right of the
Auto reject mode slider to turn it on
ON . The slider color
indicates the activation status of the Auto reject mode.
Call Functions and Contacts List

• OFF: disables the automatic rejection feature. You must then manually
reject incoming phone calls.
4. Tap the Auto reject mode field to configure your automatic
rejection settings. Rejected calls are routed automatically to
your voicemail. Choose from:
• All numbers: enables the features for all known and unknown numbers,
including those contacts that are not assigned to the rejection list.
• Auto reject numbers: automatically rejects all entries assigned to the
Reject list/Blacklist.

Adding numbers to the rejection list
Entries can be added to the list via either the Contacts menu or via
the Auto reject list menu. The Contacts menu option assigns all
numbers for an individual as rejected. The Auto reject list allows to
assign individual numbers.
To assign single number as rejected via Auto reject list:
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Phone).

2. Press
and then tap Call settings page, tap Call restriction
➔ Auto reject list.
3. Tap
(Create) and either enter the phone number or select
a Contact from your Logs or Contacts list.
4. Tap Save to complete the assignment.

International Calls
1. From the Home screen, tap
and then touch and hold
until the device shows “+” on-screen.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code, area
code, and phone number.
3. If you make a mistake, tap
4. Touch and hold
5. Tap

once to delete a single digit.

to delete all digits.

Pause Dialing
You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with
automated systems, such as voicemail or financial phone numbers.
• 2 Second Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after a
two-second pause. This is indicated in the number string as a comma (,).

• Wait sends the next set of numbers only after tapping Yes . This is
indicated in the number string as a semicolon (;).
1. From the Home screen, tap
and use the
on-screen keypad to enter the phone number.
and then tap Add 2 sec pause. This feature adds an
2. Press
automatic two-second pause.
3. Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that will be
dialed automatically after the second pause.
Tip: You can create pauses longer than three seconds by entering
multiple 2-sec pauses.
4. Tap

.
Call Functions and Contacts List

Wait Dialing
Inserting a Wait into your dialing sequence means that the phone
waits until it hears a dial tone before proceeding with the next
sequence of numbers.
1. From the Home screen, tap
and use the on-screen
keypad to enter the phone number.
and then tap Add wait. This feature causes the
2. Press
phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set
of entered digits.
3. Tap

4. Once prompted to Send the following tones?, tap Yes to dial
the remaining digits.

Redialing the Last Number
The device stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed, received,
or missed if the caller is identified.
To recall any of these numbers:
1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Tap the Logs tab to display the list of recent calls.
3. Tap the name/number and tap

Speed Dialing
Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts List, you
can set up to 99 speed dial entries (2-100) and then dial them easily
whenever you want, simply by touching the associated numeric key.
Note: Speed dial location #1 must be reserved for Voicemail use.

Setting Up Speed Dial Entries
Important! Speed dial location #1 is reserved for Voicemail. No other
number can be assigned to this slot.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press

and then tap Speed dial setting. The Speed dial

setting screen displays a virtual list of locations with the
numbers 2 through 100.
3. Tap an unassigned number slot. The Select contact screen
displays.
4. Tap a contact and select a number to assign it to the speed dial
location. The selected contact number/image is displayed in
the speed dial number box.

Call Functions and Contacts List

Changing a Speed Dial Entry Order
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press

and then tap Speed dial setting.

Important! The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and another
number cannot be assigned to this slot.
3. Press

and then tap Change order.

4. Tap the current entry then tap the new target speed dial
location.
Note: Tapping 2 existing speed dial locations causes the entries to
switch positions.
5. Press
to exit the Change order screen and return to the
previous screen.

Removing a Speed Dial Entry
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press

and then tap Speed dial setting.

3. Touch and hold a existing on-screen speed dial location and
select Delete from the context menu.
– or –
Press

and then tap Delete. Tap an entry and select

(Remove entry).
4. Press

to return to the previous screen.

Making a Call Using Speed Dial
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the
Contacts List for speed dialing.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Touch and hold a previously created speed dial location
(numbers 2-100, or 1 if you are dialing voicemail) until the
number begins to dial.
3. If you are not certain of the speed dial location, tap
➔
➔ Speed dial setting and tap a speed dial
number to view the assigned phone number.

Using S Voice
This is a voice recognition application used to activate a wide variety of
functions on your device. This is a natural language recognition
application.
This goes beyond the Google Search Voice Actions feature
that simply recognizes Google commands and search terms.
You can ask it questions (Is it raining in Dallas?) or give it commands
(Show my where to find cheap gas).
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(S Voice).
2. Read the on-screen Samsung Disclaimer and tap Confirm.
3. Review the Terms of service and tap Agree to continue.
4. Navigate through the following on-screen tutorial screens by
reading the information and tapping Next, or tap Skip to
continue without reading the information.
5. Wake up the application by repeating the phrase Hi Galaxy.

Call Functions and Contacts List

Note: The wake-up command/phrase can be changed from “Hi
Galaxy” to anything else. For more information, refer to
“Samsung Unlock Options” on page 368.
6. Tap
(Speak) if the device does not hear you or to give
it a command.
Example 1:
• I want to find the best pizza online.
• Tap
and say “Find me the best Pizza”. This launches an
Internet search.
Example 2:
• I want to find the nearest gas station.
• Tap
and say “Find me the nearest gas station”. This launches
the Map application and indicates where these are in relation to your
current position.

In Call Options
Your phone provides a number of features that are available for use
during a call.

Call
duration

Extra volume
enabled

Dials
a number
Noise
Reduction
Adds a
new call
Activates or
Deactivates
speakerphone

Ends the
call

Mutes or Unmutes
the call

Activates or
Deactivates
Bluetooth
Headset

Adjusting the Call Volume
During a call, use the Volume keys on the left side of the device, to
adjust the earpiece volume.

During a call, press the Up volume key to increase the volume
level and the Down volume key to decrease the level.
– or –
Tap the on-screen Extra volume button to increase the
incoming call volume even more than by just using the volume
keys.
Call Functions and Contacts List

• Enabled/disabled via the Call settings menu (Call settings ➔ Use
extra vol. for calls). For more information, refer to “Configuring
General Call Settings” on page 337.
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ring volume using
these keys.

Placing a Call on Hold
You can place the current call on hold whenever you want. If your
network supports this service, you can also make another call while
a call is in progress.
To make a new call while a call is in progress:
1. Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it up
in Call history.
2. Tap Add call to dial the second call.
3. Dial the new phone number and tap

Turning the Speakerphone on and off
While on a call, you can use your Speakerphone by following these
steps:
1. Tap
(Speaker off) to toggle the speakerphone on.
Speaker

2. Tap

Speaker

(Speaker on) to toggle the speakerphone off.

Tip: When the speaker is turned On, the color of the speaker is green.
When the speaker is turned Off, the color of the speaker is gray.

Muting a Call
1. Tap
(Mute off) to turn mute on so the other caller cannot
hear you speaking.
Mute

2. Tap
(Mute on) to turn mute off and resume your
conversation.
Mute

Switching to Bluetooth Headset
1. Pair the target Bluetooth headset prior to your call.
2. While on a call, switch to the Bluetooth headset instead of
speaker by tapping
(Headset off).
Headset

3. At the prompt, tap Turn on to enable Bluetooth if it is not
already activated.
4. While on a call, switch back to the device speaker by tapping
(Headset on).
Headset

Call Functions and Contacts List

More In-call Options
During a call you can save the current caller’s information to the
Contacts list, or create a Memo.
Viewing the Contacts List
During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list.
1. Press
and then tap Contacts.
2. Browse the Contacts list for the information you need.
3. Press

to return to the active call.

Creating a Message During a Call
During a call you can create a message.
1. Press
and then tap Message ➔

(Compose).

2. Address and create the message.
3. Review your message and tap

(Send).

Creating a Memo During a Call
During a call it may be necessary to record information (a Note).
1. Press
and then tap Memo.
2. Use the keyboard to enter the note then tap Save.
• If desired, press
➔ Change background to select a new memo
background color before saving. Tap Done to save the new selection.

Adjusting Noise Reduction
During a call it may be necessary to adjust the noise reduction
feature. Activating this feature can improve the quality of your
conversation by reducing ambient noise.
1. Press
and then tap Noise reduction off to toggle the status
and activate the feature.
2. Press
and then tap Noise reduction on to toggle the status
and deactivate the feature.
Adjusting the Call Sound Setting
During a call it may be necessary to adjust the sound equalizer for
the current call.
1. Press
and then tap My call sound.
2. Select an available option.
Choose from: Off, Soft sound, Clear sound, Optimized for left
ear, or Optimized for right ear.

Multi-Party calls

Making a Multi-Party Call
A multi-party call is a network service that multiple people to
participate in a multi-party or conference call.
For further details about subscribing to this service, contact
customer service.
Setting up a Multi-Party Call
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Dial the number for the first participant and tap

3. Tap Add call, enter the second phone number and
tap
. The first caller is placed on hold.
Call Functions and Contacts List

4. Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call and tap
Merge. The two calls are now joined into a multi-party call and
display in the order in which they were called.
Important! Multiple callers can be joined to a single
multi-party line. Additional callers participate in a new
Multiparty session and are held in conjunction with the
previous multiparty call. You can swap or place each multiparty call on hold.
Call Waiting
You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in progress, if
this service is supported by the network.
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone.
To answer a new call while you have a call in progress:
1. In a single motion, touch
and slide it in any direction to
answer the new incoming call. The previous caller is placed on
hold and the new incoming call is made active.
Note: The new caller appears at the top of the list. The previous caller
is placed on hold and appears at the bottom of the list.
2. Tap Swap to switch between the two calls. This places the
new caller on hold and activates the previous call.
Important! The currently active call is displayed with a green
background.

3. Tap Swap again to switch back.

Logs Tab
The Logs tab is a list of the phone numbers (or Contacts entries) for
calls you placed, accepted, or missed. The Logs tab makes redialing
a number fast and easy. It is continually updated as your device
automatically adds new numbers to the beginning of the list and
removes the oldest entries from the bottom of the list.
The Notification area of the Home screen (upper-left) displays phone
notifications, status, or alerts such as:
Displays when a call is in progress.
Displays when a call was missed.

Accessing the Logs Tab
1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

Logs

(Logs tab).

2. Tap an entry to view available options.
Note: The Logs tab only records calls that occur while the phone is
turned on. If a call is received while it is turned off, it will not be
included in your calling history.

Call Functions and Contacts List

Each entry contains the phone number (if it is available) and
Contacts entry name (if the number is in your Contacts).
Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device.
Indicates any received calls that were answered.
Indicates a missed call.
Indicates any received calls that were rejected.
Indicates auto rejected calls.

Accessing Logs from The Notifications Area
1. Locate

from the Notifications area of the Status bar.

2. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
Notifications panel.
3. Tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen.
This list provides easy access to redial an entry, or you can also
choose to access two types of history entry lists depending on how
they are touched.

100

Call logs - Caller Overview
• Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the Call options screen:
• Create contact to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts.
• Update existing to update an existing Contacts entry with new
information.
• View contact to view the selected Contact’s information.
• Call allows you to redial the entry by name or number.
• Send message allows you to create a new text message to the selected
entry.
• Time provides the time and date of the call and its duration.
• Copy to dialing screen press
to edit the selected number before
you place your next outbound call.
• Delete press

to delete the Contacts entry.

• Send number press
to send the current Contacts entry
information to an external recipient.
• Add to reject list press
to add the current phone number to an
automatic rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller will be
blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone.

• Touch and hold an entry to display the entry-specific context menu:
• Call [Number] to redial the current phone number.
• Send message allows you to create a new text message to the selected
entry.
• Copy to dialing screen to make alterations to the current phone
number prior to redial.
• Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts.
Call Functions and Contacts List

101

• Send number to send the current Contacts entry information to an
external recipient.
• View contact to view the information for the currently stored Contacts
entry.
• Add to reject list to add the current phone number to an automatic
rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller will be blocked
from making an incoming calls to your phone.
• Delete to delete the entry from the Logs list.

Altering Numbers from the Logs List
If you need to make a call from the Logs screen and you need to
alter the number prior to dialing, you can add the appropriate prefix
by prepending the number.
1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

Logs

2. Touch and hold an entry to access the entry-specific context
menu.
3. Tap Copy to dialing screen.
4. Edit the number using the on-screen keypad or delete digits by
tapping
to erase the numbers.
5. Tap

102

once the number has been changed.

Erasing the Call logs List
You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current entries
from the Logs list.
To clear a single entry from the list:
1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

Logs

2. Touch and hold an entry and select Delete ➔ OK.
To clear all entries from the list:
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press

➔

Logs

and then tap Delete.

3. Tap Select all.
4. Tap Delete to continue with the erasure.
– or –
Tap Cancel to stop the current process.

Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen
When you are unable to answer a call for any reason and your screen
is locked, the number of missed calls are displayed on the Lock
screen immediately after a call is missed.
1. Press
(Power/End) to reactivate the screen.
2. Touch and drag the button (with the number of missed calls on
it) anywhere on the screen. The Logs tab is then displayed.

Call Functions and Contacts List

103

Section 4: Entering Text
This section describes how to select the desired text input method
when entering characters into your phone. This section also
describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the amount
of key strokes associated with entering text.
Your device comes equipped with an orientation detector that can
tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or sideways
(Landscape) orientation. This is useful when entering text.
Your phone also provides several on-screen keypad text entry
options to make the task of text entry that much easier.

Text Input Methods

There are three text input methods available:
• Google voice typing: provides a voice to text interface.

• Samsung keyboard (default): an on-screen QWERTY keyboard that
can be used in both portrait and landscape orientation.

• Swype: is enabled so as you can enter text as you swipe across the
on-screen keyboard. Instead of tapping each key, use your finger
to trace over each letter of a word.
The on-screen QWERTY keypad works the same in both portrait and
landscape mode.

104

Selecting the Text Input Method
The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two
locations:
Settings Menu:

From the main Settings page, tap Language and input ➔
Default and select an input method.

Text Input field:
1. From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion,
touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the
screen to open the Notifications screen.
2. Tap
(Choose input method) and select an available input
method.

Entering Text Using Swype
Swype™ is the default text input method that allows you to enter a
word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter, lifting your
finger between words. Swype uses error correcting algorithms and a
language model to predict the next word. Swype also includes a
touch predictive text system.
The on-screen keyboard options are different between the Android
keyboard and Swype on-screen input methods.
Note: If after enabling Swype you are prompted to Contribute usage
date, read the on-screen disclaimer and tap either Accept or
Cancel.

Entering Text

105

Enabling and Configuring Swype
If you configure another text input method (Samsung keyboard) you
must re-enable Swype before using the Swype keyboard.
When Swype is enabled there can also be normal keyboard
functionality.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Language and input.
2. Tap Default ➔ Swype.
For more detailed information on Swype settings, see “Swype
Settings” on page 374.

Swype Text Entry Tips
You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video or
tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following Swype text
entry tips.
• Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such as pp in
apple).

• Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a
selection.

• Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter contractions.
• Double-touch on the word you want to change to correct a misspelled
word, then touch the delete key to erase one character. Touch and hold the
delete key to erase an entire word.

106

Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field
to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
2. With Swype as your text entry method, select one of the
following text mode options:
• ABC

Edit

ABC

to use Swype with alphanumeric characters from the on-

screen keyboard.
123

• SYM (Symbol) +!= to enter numbers and symbols from the
on-screen keyboard.
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the
key changes
to
and all letters that follow are in lower case.

Swype Keyboard Overview
• Recipients: a field where you can enter the recipients of the current
message. You can choose from Groups, Favorites, Contacts, or Logs.
• Text Input field: a field where text, number, or other characters can be
entered.
• CAPS/ALT key: When in 123ABC mode, this key changes the
capitalization of the subsequent entered characters. When in SYM
mode, this key can show additional symbol characters.
• SWYPE settings: Touch and hold this button to access the Swype
settings screen.

Entering Text

107

• Text Input mode: There are two available modes: 123ABC and SYM.

– 123ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters and a few common
punctuation marks. Text mode button indicates SYM.

– SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers. Text mode button
indicates 123ABC.

Recipients
Text input field
Suggestions

Current
Mode

CAPS/ALT
key
Delete
SWYPE Settings
Text Input mode

108

Using 123ABC Mode in SWYPE
In 123ABC mode, you can enter only letters and a few common
punctuation marks from the on-screen keyboard. The text mode key
shows 123 .
+!=

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field
to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
Edit

2. Tap ABC to configure the keyboard for 123ABC mode
(showing letters and numbers on the on-screen keys). Once in
this mode, the text input type shows 123 .
+!=

Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the
key changes
to
and all letters that follow are in lower case.
3. Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to form a word.
– If you make a mistake, tap
to erase a single character. Touch and
hold
to erase an entire word.
4. Tap

(Send) to deliver the message.
All lowercase
Displays when the next character is entered in lowercase.
Pressing this while in 123SYM mode, reveals additional
numeric-symbols keys.
Initial Uppercase
Displays when the first character of each word is
entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters are
lowercase.
Entering Text

109

All Uppercase
Displays when all characters will be entered as
uppercase characters.
By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and the following
letters are lower case. After a word is entered and you lift your
finger, the cursor automatically adds a space after the word.
Note: If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry, an
on-screen popup appears to provide additional word choices.

Entering Numbers and Symbols in SWYPE
By using the on-screen keyboard in portrait mode, some symbols are
not available (such as Emoticons or Smileys).
In SYM mode using Swype, you can only enter symbols and numbers
from the on-screen keyboard.
Edit
Once in SYM mode, the text mode key shows ABC .
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field
to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
123

2. Tap +!= to configure the keyboard for SYM mode. Once in
Edit
this mode, the text input type shows ABC .
3. Tap the on-screen key for the number or symbol you want to
enter.
4. Tap

to select from additional symbols.

For example:
123
• To enter ®: tap +!= ➔
110

and select the ® key.

Using the Samsung Keyboard
This QWERTY keyboard can be used to enter text in either a Portrait
or landscape orientation. The only difference between the two
orientations are the sizes of the keys.
From a screen where you enter text, rotate your phone
counterclockwise to a landscape orientation. The on-screen QWERTY
keyboard displays.

The Samsung Keyboard
This device has a built-in, QWERTY keypad (portrait mode) or
keyboard (landscape mode). Using the QWERTY keypad/ keyboard,
you can type letter, numbers, punctuation, and other characters.
To use the Samsung keyboard you must first configure the settings
to default to the Samsung keyboard.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Language and input ➔
Default ➔ Samsung keyboard.
– or –
From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion,
touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the
screen, then select
(Choose input method) ➔ Samsung
keyboard.
2. The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung
keyboard configuration for all subsequent text input.

Entering Text

111

Shift key

Text input field

Input Mode
Current Mode
Indicator Input Options
/Settings

Send

Delete

For detailed information about the Samsung Keyboard settings, see
“Samsung Keyboard Settings” on page 377.
For detailed information about using Predictive Text, see “Predictive
Text - Advanced Settings” on page 378.

112

Entering Text using Different Input Options
Although the default text input method with the Samsung keyboard
is to use the on-screen keys you have other options.
Note: If you do not see the Voice typing input method button, touch and
hold and drag across the icons to select
(Settings) then
select it from the available options.
1. From within an active message, tap the text input field to
reveal the on-screen keyboard.
2. Tap
(Input Methods) to use the default Voice typing input
method to convert your spoken words to
on-screen text.
– or –
Touch and hold
as:

to select from other input methods such

• Handwriting to launch an on-screen handwriting area that can be used
to convert on-screen patterns (text) to text.
• Clipboard to launch the device’s clipboard area from where you can
select a current clipboard item to place in your current message.
• Settings to access the Samsung keyboard settings menu.

Entering Text

113

Changing the Text Input Mode in Keyboard
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field
to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
2. With Samsung keyboard as your text entry method, select one
of the following text mode options:
• Abc ABC : to use alphabetic characters from the on-screen
keyboard. In this mode, the text mode button displays
• Symbol/Numeric

123
Sym

: to enter numbers by pressing the numbers

selecting them on the on-screen keyboard. In this mode, the text mode
button displays ABC .
There are up to 3 available pages of numeric symbols available by
tapping 1/3 .
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, tap
capitalization.

to toggle

All lowercase
Displays when the next character is entered in
lowercase.
Initial Uppercase
Displays when the first character of each word is
entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters are
lowercase.

114

All Uppercase
Displays when all characters will be entered as
uppercase characters.
By default, the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the
following letters are lowercased. After a character is entered, the
cursor automatically advances to the next space.

Using ABC Mode in Samsung Keyboard
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field
to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
2. Tap ABC to configure the keyboard for ABC mode. Once in
this mode, the text input type shows 123
Sym .
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the
key changes
to
and all letters that follow are in lower case.
3. Enter your text using the on-screen keyboard.
– If you make a mistake, tap
to erase a single character. Touch and
hold
to erase an entire word.
4. Tap

(Send) to deliver the message.

Entering Text

115

Using Symbol/Numeric Mode
Use the Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols,
or emoticons. While in this mode, the text mode key
displays ABC .
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field
to reveal the on-screen keyboard. Rotate the phone
counterclockwise to a landscape orientation, if desired.
123

2. Tap Sym to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode. Once
in this mode, the text input type shows ABC .
3. Tap a number, symbol, or emoticon character.
4. Tap ABC to return to ABC mode.
To enter symbols:
1. Tap

123
Sym

to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode.

2. Tap the appropriate symbol key.
– or –
Tap 1/3 button to cycle through additional pages.
• The first number on this key indicates which page (1, 2, or 3) of
additional characters is active.

116

Using the Google Voice Typing
This feature uses Google voice recognition to convert your spoken
words into on-screen text.
You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice typing
feature.
1. From the keyboard, touch the top of the screen and drag it
down to display your notification panel.
2. Tap

(Choose input method) ➔ Google voice typing.

3. At the Listening prompt
(Speak now), speak clearly and
distinctly into the microphone.
The text is displayed in the message as you are speaking.
4. Tap
– or –
Tap

(Done) when you are finished.
(Resume) to resume recognition.

Note: The feature works best when you break your message down
into smaller segments.
For detailed information about configuring Google Voice typing, see
“Configure Google Voice Typing” on page 380.

Entering Text

117

Using Google Voice Typing
1. From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion,
touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the
screen, then select
(Choose input method) ➔ Google
voice typing. The virtual keyboard is then removed and all
subsequent input to done via the microphone as text to
speech.
2. Speak into the device’s microphone and watch your text being
entered on-screen.
3. If the text is incorrect, tap DELETE.

118

Section 5: Contacts
This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts List. You
can save phone numbers to your phone’s memory.

Accounts

From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to
synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if you want
the applications to synchronize automatically. After determining how
you want the accounts to synchronize, indicate which account to
synchronize with your Contacts list.
1. Sign in to your Google account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
Add account.

(Apps) ➔

(Settings) ➔

3. Tap an account type to add.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions. The selected account type
synchronizes with your Contacts list.

Contacts

119

Contacts List
Creating a Contact
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your
Contacts List is your device’s built-in memory.
If existing Google and Corporate email accounts have been
synchronized to your phone, these will be made available to your
device during the creation of new entries. These new Contacts
entries can be assigned or saved to synced accounts such as Phone,
SIM, Google, or Corporate.
Your device automatically sorts the Contacts entries alphabetically.
You can create either a Phone, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync,
Samsung account, or Google contact.
Note: Before you can save a contact to the Phone, Contact settings
must be set to Save new contacts to Phone.
Important! The Google and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account
types are only visible after creating an email account of
those types on your phone.

• Phone contacts are stored locally on the device.
Note: If the phone is ever reset to its factory default parameters,
contacts stored on the phone can be lost.

• Samsung account contacts are shared with your existing Samsung
account.
120

• Google contacts are shared with your existing Google account and can
also be imported to your phone after you have created a Google Mail
account.

• Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (also known as Work or Outlook)
contacts are those contacts that are intended to be shared with either an
Exchange Server or from within Microsoft® Outlook®.

• Add new account lets you create a new account type. Choose from
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, Samsung account, or Google.
Note: When storing an entry into your micro SIM card, note that only
the Name, and Number are saved. To save additional
information for a particular contact, such as notes, email, dates,
etc., it is important to save that Contact into your phone’s
onboard memory.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap

(Contacts).

to create a contact.

Note: You can also add a new contact by entering a number from the
keypad and pressing
and then tap Add to Contacts ➔
Create contact. Continue with step 3.
3. Tap a destination type (Phone, Samsung account, Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync, or Google) (depending on where you
want to save the new contact information).

Contacts

121

4. Tap the Name field and enter a name for this contact using the
displayed keypad.
• Tap
to access additional name entries such as: Name prefix, First
name, Middle name, Last name, and Name suffix.
5. Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact.
Selections are: Image or Take picture.
Note: The label entries below can change and are dependant on the
selected destination type (ex: the Other and Custom might not
appear with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type).
6. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone field) and scroll
through the list to select a category such as Mobile, Home,
Work, Work Fax, Home Fax, Pager, Other, Custom, or Callback.
7. Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number.
• Tap
on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously entered
phone number.
• Tap

to enter an additional phone number

• Tap

to remove a previously entered phone number.

122

8. Enter additional information such as: Email, Address, Events,
Groups, Ringtone, Message alert, Vibration pattern or tap Add
another field to input additional category information.
• Add another field contains the following options: Phonetic name,
Organization, IM, Notes, Nickname, Website, Internet call, or
Relationship.
• Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and
categories.
9. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.
– or –
Tap Cancel to delete the current entry.
To save a Number from your Keypad:
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Phone).

2. Enter a phone number using the on-screen dialpad.
3. Tap Add to Contacts ➔ Create contact or select the Contact
entry from the on-screen list.
– or –
Press
and then tap Add to Contacts ➔ Create contact or
select the Contact entry from the on-screen list.
• If you're updating an existing contact, tap the entry from the list and
proceed to step 5.
4. Tap a destination type (Phone, SIM, Samsung account,
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, or Google) (depending on
where you want to save the new contact information).

Contacts

123

5. Tap the Name and enter a name for this contact using the
displayed keypad.
• Tap
to access additional name entries such as: Name prefix, First
name, Middle name, Last name, and Name suffix.
6. Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact.
Selections are: Image or Take picture.
Note: The label entries below can change and are dependant on the
selected destination type (ex: the Other and Custom might not
appear with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type).
7. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone field) and scroll
through the list to select a category such as Mobile, Home,
Work, Work Fax, Home Fax, Pager, Other, Custom, or Callback.
8. Enter additional fields as desired.
9. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.
– or –
Tap Cancel to delete the current entry.
Note: For further details about how to enter characters, see “Text
Input Methods” on page 104

124

Finding a Contact
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names onto
either your SIM card, your phone’s built-in memory, or an external
location (such as Google or Exchange). They are all physically
separate but are used as a single entity, called Contacts.
Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card, the
maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may differ.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
2. Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed.
– or –
Tap the Search field and begin entering the entry’s name.
Matching entries are then displayed. This process filters
through all of your current account Contact entries to only
show you the matching entries.
– or –
In a single motion, touch and hold the letter tab area (on the
right) until on-screen letters appear, then scroll through the
list. You are then taken to that section of the Contacts list.
Touch the contact entry.

Contacts

125

Tabs
Search
Contacts
field

Create
Contacts

Tabbed
Navigation
Contacts

Editing Contact Information
1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Tap a contact name from the list and tap
– or –
Press

(Edit).

and tap Edit.

– or –
Touch and hold a Contacts entry from the main Contacts list
and then tap Edit.

126

Context
Menu

3. Edit the contact information then:
• Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or
• Tap Cancel to delete the current entry.

Contacts

127

Adding a Number to an Existing Contact
1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Touch and hold an entry and
select Edit to reveal the Contact
entry’s details screen.
3. Tap a phone number field and
enter a phone number.
• Tap
on the QWERTY
keyboard to remove a previously
entered phone number.
• Tap
to enter an additional
phone number
• Tap
to remove a previously
entered phone number.
4. Enter additional information
Contact Details Screen
such as: Email, Address,
Events, Groups, Ringtone, Message alert, Vibration pattern or
tap Add another field to input additional category information.
• Add another field contains the following options: Phonetic name,
Organization, IM, Notes, Nickname, Website, Internet call, or
Relationship.
• Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and
categories.
5. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.
– or –
Tap Cancel to delete the current entry.
128

Adding a Pause or Wait to an Existing Contact
1. From the Home screen, tap
and use the
on-screen keypad to enter a new phone number.
and then tap Add 2 sec pause. This feature adds an
2. Press
automatic two-second pause.
– or –
and then tap Add wait. This feature causes the
Press
phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set
of entered digits.
3. Tap Add to Contacts ➔ Update existing.
4. Scroll through the available list of existing entries and select
the desired target.
Note: This new phone number is then added as a new number to the
selected entry.
5. Tap the label button (to the left of the new phone number) and
scroll through the list to select a category type.
6. Tap Save to store and update the entry.

Deleting Contacts
Important! Once Contacts list entries are deleted, they cannot be
recovered.
1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select Delete
➔ OK.
Contacts

129

Contact List Options
1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press
. The following options display:
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.
• Import/Export: imports or exports contacts to or from the USB storage
location or SD card, you can also share namecards via methods such as
Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Merge with Samsung account: allows you to merge all of your current
Contact entries with your active Samsung account. If several of your
contacts are from other external sources, this allows you to “back them
up” or copy them to your Samsung account. Tap OK to continue or
Cancel to exit.
• Merge with Google: allows you to merge all of your current Contact
entries with your active Google/Gmail account. If several of your contacts
are from other sources such as Corporate email, Internet email,
Facebook, etc.., this allows you to “back them up” or copy them to your
Gmail account. Tap OK to continue or Cancel to exit.
• Accounts: allows you to Auto sync app data or add and manage
mobile accounts on Samsung account, Google, or Add an account such
as (Samsung account, Email, Facebook, Google, LDAP, or Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync). This option also allows you to manually
synchronize all of your current contacts with their respective accounts.
• Speed dial setting: allows you to set up speed-dialing.
• Send email: allows you to send an email using your Google account.
• Send message: allows you to send a text or picture message.
130

• Contacts to display: allows you to choose All contacts, Phone,
Samsung account, Gmail, or only display contacts that are part of a
customized list.
• Settings: provides access to Contacts settings.
Options include: Only contacts with phones, List by, Display contacts by,
Service numbers, and Contact sharing settings.

Contact Menu Options
1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Touch and hold an entry to reveal the context menu. The
following options display:
• Edit: allows you to edit the currently selected Contacts entry.
• Delete: allows you to delete the currently selected Contacts entry.
• Join contact: allows you to link the current contact to another current
contact. Similar to a “see also” feature. If you can’t remember a
contact’s information, linking entries can help you find the person you
are looking for.
• Share contact information: allows you to send the current entry info via
text message.
• Add to Favorites: allows you to copy the current Contacts entry to the
list within the Favorites tab.
• Remove from favorites: allows you to remove the current Contacts
entry from the Favorites tab.
• Add to group: allows you to add the current Contacts entry to an
existing group.

Contacts

131

• Share namecard via: allows you to send the current Contact entry’s
information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth, Email
(Exchange or Internet), Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Print contact info: allows you to print selected information on a
compatible Samsung printer.

Contact Entry Options
1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Tap an entry to reveal the Contact
entry’s Overview Screen. This
screen contains Name, contact
numbers, email, and linked
contact information.
3. Press
to reveal the context
menu specific to this entry.
4. Tap an available option.

Contact Overview Screen

132

Joining Contact Information
Most people now maintain multiple email accounts, social
networking logins, and other similar account information. For
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a
corporate email account login because they are maintained
separately and for different groups of people.
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts. When you
synchronize your phone with those accounts, each account creates a
separate contact entry in the Contacts list.
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith) has a regular email account that
you maintain in Gmail, but also has a Facebook account under her
maiden and married name, as well as a Video! chat account, when
you merge those accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of
her entries and view the information in one record.
Joining contact information makes sending messages easy. You can
select any account email address or information all from one screen,
versus searching multiple, individual screens to locate the desired
account information.
Next time you synchronize your phone with your accounts, any
updates contacts make to email account names, email addresses,
etc. automatically update in your contacts list.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to link to another
entry) to reveal the Contact entry’s Overview Screen.
Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or
account information.
Contacts

133

3. Press

and then tap Join contact.

4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to link). The
second contact is now linked with the first and the account
information is merged into one screen.
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but displays
in one record for easier viewing when you link the contacts.
Important! It is the first contact image that is displayed for both, and
the first contact’s name that is used.
For example: If Amy (original entry) is joined with Julie
(second entry). Julie seems to disappear and only Amy
remains. Tap the Amy entry (showing the Amy image) to
view both.
5. Tap the main linked contact to view the contact information
you linked. The contacts and information displays with an icon
next to the contact name to indicate what type of account
information is contained in the entry.

134

Unjoining a Contact
1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you want to
unjoin an entry). This reveals the details for entry.
Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or
account information.
3. Tap the Connection area.
– or –
Press

and then tap Separate contact.

4. Tap
next to the entry you want to unjoin and select OK.
The contacts are “unjoined” or separated and no longer
display in the merged record screen. Both contacts now go
back to being separately displayed.

Marking a Contact as Default
When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other
messaging type applications, the application needs to know which
information is primary (default) in a contact entry list. For example,
when you say “Call John Smith”, if you have three phone records for
John Smith, the Voice dialer is looking for the “default” number or
entry.
The Mark as default option marks one entry in a contact record to
use as the default. This comes in handy when you have multiple
entries for the same person.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Tap a Contact entry.
Contacts

135

3. Press
and then tap Mark as default. The Mark as default
screen displays radio buttons next to the contact name, phone
number, or other contact information.
4. Tap the radio button next to the entry information you want to
be the primary information (such as name, phone number, or
email) and select Done.
Note: If there are multiple phone numbers assigned to an entry,
assigning one as the default will automatically dial that number
when the contact is selected for dialing.

Sending a Namecard
A Namecard contains contact information, and can be sent to
recipients as a Virtual Business Card (V-card) attachment using
Bluetooth, Google Mail, or as a message.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Tap a Contact entry.
3. Press
and then tap Share namecard via and select a
delivery method: Bluetooth, Email (Exchange or Internet), Gmail,
Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.
The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and is
delivered when you send the message.
Note: Email appears as an option only after an Internet or Exchange
email account has been created.

136

Sending All Current Namecards
Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time, you can send all
of your current entries at once.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Press

and then tap Import/Export ➔ Send namecard via.

3. Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all currently
displayed Contact entries.
4. Tap Done and select a delivery method:
• Bluetooth to transmit the contacts to another bluetooth-compatible
device.
• Email to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing email (Exchange or
Internet).
• Gmail to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing Internet-based
email.
• Messaging to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing text message.
Note: The Web storage Upload feature requires that you are logged
into your Samsung account prior to upload.
• Wi-Fi Direct to transmit the entries to another Wi-Fi Direct enabled
device.

Contacts

137

Sending a namecard using Bluetooth
You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a
recipient. For more information, refer to “Creating a Contact” on
page 120.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on-screen context
menu.
3. Tap Share namecard via ➔ Bluetooth.
Important! You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature.
4. Tap the Bluetooth device in which to send this name card.
Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient.

Copying Contact Information
Copying Contact Information to the microSD Card
This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the
phone’s memory, onto the SIM card.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. From the Contacts List, press
➔ Export to SD card.

.
and then tap Import/Export

3. Tap OK to choose all current phone contact entries.

138

Synchronizing Contacts
Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and
manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote
accounts to your phone. Prior to syncing, you must first have an
active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current Contact
entries, and be signed into your account via the phone.
With syncing, any Contacts entries (with phone numbers, email
addresses, pictures, etc.) are updated and synced with your device.
1. From the main Settings page and then navigate to the Accounts
area.
2. Select the email account containing the contacts you wish to
synchronize.
3. Tap
within the adjacent account field to reveal the
account’s synchronization settings screen.
4. To synchronize only Contacts, toggle the active state of the
Sync Contacts field. A green checkmark indicates the feature is
enabled.
Note: The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several
minutes. If after 10-20 minutes, your list has not been updated,
repeat step 2-3.
5. Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact
information.
Note: Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your Gmail and
Corporate accounts via the device.
Contacts

139

Display Options
The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose which
contacts to display. You can also choose to display only contacts that
have phone numbers.
Note: Once a display filter has been selected, only those Contact
entries are shown until the All contacts option is re-selected.
1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press
and then tap Contacts to display. Select any of the
following to filter according to the selection:
• All contacts allows you to display all available Contacts.
• Phone lists those Contacts currently found only on your Phone.
• Samsung account lists those Contacts currently found and sync’d
within the Samsung account.
• Google lists those Contacts currently found within the Google account.
• Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync lists those Contacts currently found
within the Exchange account.
• Customized list allows you to enable which account categories are
displayed. For example, on Google contacts, you can filter which Contact
categories are shown (Friends, Family, etc..)

140

Adding more Contacts via Accounts and
Sync
When you synchronize applications such as Facebook, Twitter,
MySpace, a corporate email account, or Google, using the Accounts
and sync option synchronizes the data from the selected account
type with your Contacts list.
1. From the main Settings page and then navigate to the Accounts
area.
2. Tap Add account.
3. Determine which type of account information you want to
synchronize with your Contact list. Selections are: Samsung
account, Email, Facebook, Google, LDAP, or Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync.
4. Tap an account type to add.
5. Follow the prompts. The selected account type synchronizes
with your Contacts list.
6. After synchronizing accounts you may want to link contact
information. For more information, refer to “Joining Contact
Information” on page 133.

Contacts

141

To add Facebook content to your Contacts list:
You can now add your Facebook contact information, such as
pictures, email, and phone numbers directly to your Contacts list. All
of their current contact information is then migrated over to your
phone. If a Contacts entry already exists with a slightly different
name, separate entries are created and can later be linked (joined)
together into a single entry.
Important! This process not only synchronizes your contact
information but also your status, events, and more.
1. From the main Settings page and then navigate to the
Accounts area.
2. Tap Add account➔ Facebook.
3. You are prompted to download the Facebook application from
the Play Store.
• Tap Install ➔ ACCEPT to complete the process.
• Tap Open to launch the application.
4. Log into your Facebook account:
• Enter your account’s access Email and Password information and tap
Log in.
5. If prompted, configure any requested optional permissions and
tap Log in.
6. Tap those contact settings you wish to synchronize (all are
enabled by default). A green check mark indicates the feature
is enabled.
• Choose from: Sync interval settings, Sync Gallery, or Sync calendar.
142

7. Tap Done to complete the login and sync process.
8. Return to the Accounts and sync screen and resync this new
Social Network account.
To resync Social Network Contacts:
1. From the main Settings page and then navigate to the Accounts
area.
within the adjacent SNS account field to
2. Tap Facebook ➔
reveal the account’s synchronization settings screen.
3. Choose the parameters to sync (ex: Sync Calendar, Sync
Contacts, or Sync Gallery) and tap Sync now.
Note: From the main Accounts and sync page you can also tap Sync
all to resync all accounts.

Contacts

143

Additional Contact Options
Sending an Email to a Contact
Note: Contacts must contain and email account and address before
you can use the Send email feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press
and then tap Send email. Contacts that contain an
email address display.
3. Tap the contact(s) to which you want to send an email. A check
mark displays next to the selection.
Note: The select contact must have an email as part of their details
screen.
4. Tap Done.
5. Select an email account type.
6. Compose the email and tap Send.

Export/Import
For more information, refer to “Copying Contact Information” on
page 138.

144

Contact List Settings
From this menu you can determine the default storage location for
Contacts, display your phone’s primary number, and view service
numbers listed in your Contact list.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Press
and then tap Settings. Configure any of the
following options:
• Only contacts with phones allows you to display only those contacts
containing phone numbers.
• List by defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted:
First name or Last name.
• Display contacts by defines how the current list of Contacts are listed:
First name first (ex: Steve Smith) or Last name first (Smith, Steve).
• Contact sharing settings allows you configure how your Contacts
entries are sent: individually or as a single file containing all available
entries. Tap Settings to select a share setting.

– Send all namecards allows you to set your Contact sharing option to all
so that your entire Contacts entries are sent as a group and not as
multiple single files. If all your entries are selected only a single file is sent.
Note: Your destination device must support this feature or no entries
will be received by the external device.

– Send individual namecards allows you to set your default to send
individual contacts one at a time. Even if you select all your entries, each is
sent individually.
Contacts

145

Groups
This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a call
group. This group can be one of the already present groups (Family,
Friends, or Work) or a user-created group.

Creating a New Caller Group
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press

➔

Groups

(Groups tab).

and then tap Create.

3. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen keypad to
enter a new group name. For more information, refer to “Text
Input Methods” on page 104.
4. Tap Group ringtone and select a ringtone for the group.
Selections are: Default, Ringtones, or Go to My Files.
5. Tap Vibration pattern and select a unique vibration pattern to
be associated with this group.
6. Tap Add member to then select from a list of available contacts,
tap the contact(s) you want to add, then tap Done.
7. Tap Save to store the newly created group.
Note: Some externally maintained group types (such as Google) can
only be managed or updated remotely online vs via the device.
These external types will not allow editing or deleting members
locally via the phone.

146

Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap a group entry ➔

➔

Groups

(Add group member).

3. From the available list of contacts, tap the contact(s) you want
to add. A check mark displays next to contact entry.
4. Tap Done. The selected contacts are added to the group.

Removing an Entry From a Caller Group
1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

Groups

2. Tap a group entry.
3. Press

and then tap Remove member.

4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group. A
checkmark displays next to contact entry.
5. Tap Done.The contacts are removed from the group.

Editing a Caller Group
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as part of
the selected group.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Groups .
2. Touch and hold a group entry then select Edit group.
3. Make modifications to the Group name, Group ringtone,
Vibration pattern, or Add member fields.
4. Tap Save.

Contacts

147

Deleting a Caller Group
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press

➔

Groups

and then tap Delete groups.

3. Select either Select all or tap the desired group.
4. Tap Delete.

Sending a Message to a Group
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap an existing group, and press
message.
– or –

➔

Groups

and then tap Send

Touch and hold a group entry and select Send message.
3. Select the recipients of the new message (indicated by a green
checkmark). If an entry contains multiple phone numbers,
each must be selected individually.
4. Tap Done.
5. Type your message, and tap

148

(Send).

The Favorites Tab
The Favorites tab is a list of the phone numbers that have been
designated as favorite contacts. For more information, refer to “Logs
Tab” on page 99.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Tap

Favorites

(Favorites tab).

Adding a contact to your favorites list:
1. From within the Favorites tab, press
favorites.

and select Add to

2. Place a check mark alongside those current Contacts entries
you wish to assign as favorites.
3. Tap Done to complete the process.

Contacts

149

Section 6: Messages
This section describes how to send or receive different types of
messages. It also explains the features and functionality associated
with messaging.

Types of Messages

Your phone provides the following message types:
• Text Messages

• Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages
• Email and Gmail Messages
• Hangouts
• Google+
• Messenger
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive text
messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses. To
use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service
provider’s message service.
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and receive
multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and audio messages)
to and from other mobile phones or email addresses. To use this
feature, you may need to subscribe to your service provider’s
multimedia message service.
Important! During the creation of a text message, adding an image,
sound file, or video clip automatically changes it from a
text message (SMS) to a multimedia message (MMS).

150

Message Icons on the Status Bar
Messaging icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the
display when new messages are received. For more information,
refer to “Status Bar” on page 39.
Note: The Messaging application can also be accessed by pressing
and then tapping
(Apps) ➔
(Messaging).

Creating and Sending Messages
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Compose).

(Messaging) ➔

2. Tap the Enter recipient field to manually enter a recipient.
– or –
Tap

to select from one of the following:

• Groups: to select a recipient from the Group list.
• Favorites: to select a recipient from the Favorites list.
• Contacts: to select a recipient from your Contacts list (valid entries must
have a wireless phone number or email address).
• Logs: to select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages.
3. If adding a recipient from these categories, tap the contact to
place a checkmark then tap Done. The contact displays in the
recipient field.
Note: Delete any unnecessary members by tapping their
name/number in the recipient area and selecting Delete.

Messages

151

4. Add more recipients by tapping either the Enter recipient field
or
and selecting recipients.
5. Tap the Enter message field and use the on-screen keypad to
enter a message. For more information, refer to “Text Input
Methods” on page 104.
6. Review your message and tap

(Send).

7. If you have more than one recipient, the same text message is
sent to all recipients in the Enter Recipients field.
Note: If you exit a message before you send it, it will be automatically
saved as a draft.

Quick Messaging a Number from the Contacts List
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Contacts).

2. Locate an entry from the Contacts list.
3. In a single motion, touch and drag your finger over the number
by going to the left. This action addresses a new text message
to the selected recipient.
Quick
Calling
Quick
Texting

152

Message Options
Options before composing a message
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Messaging).

2. Before composing a message, press
from the main
Messaging screen to display additional messaging options:
• Search: allows you to search through all of your messages for a certain
word or string of words. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or
phrase in which to search, then tap
. For more information, refer
to “Message Search” on page 161.
• Delete threads: allows you to delete any message thread. Select the
messages to delete and a green checkmark will appear next to the
message. Tap Delete. For more information, refer to “Deleting a
single message thread” on page 160.
• Draft messages: displays the draft messages folder and its contents.
• Locked messages: displays the locked messages folder and its
contents.
• Save messages: allows you to select available messages for storage
and archiving. Select the desired messages and tap Save.
• Settings: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more
information, refer to “Messaging Settings” on page 161.
• About: displays information about the messaging application.

Messages

153

3. Touch and hold an on-screen message and select an option:
• Add to Contacts: allows you to add the sender to either a new or
existing Contacts entry.
• View contact: allows you to view the current entry information for the
sender.
• Delete thread: deletes the entire message and its bubbles. Deleting a
single message threadFor more information, refer to “Deleting a
single message bubble” on page 160.
• Save messages: allows you to select available messages for storage
and archiving. Select the desired messages and tap Save.

Options while composing a message
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Messaging).

2. From within an open message, press
additional messaging options:
• Call: places an outgoing call to the sender.

to display

• Insert smiley: allows you to add insert smiley icons images (emoticons).
• Add text: allows you to add text items from sources such as:
S Memo, Calendar, Contacts, and Text templates.
• Preview (only in MMS): allows you to add preview the MMS message
prior to delivery.
• Add to Contacts: uses the current information to create a new Contacts
entry.
• View contact: reveals the current Contact’s overview screen.
• Add slide: converts an SMS message into an MMS (Multimedia)
message and allows you to attach an existing slideshow.
154

• Delete slide: allows you to remove a previously attached slideshow.
• Add subject: allows you to enter a subject.
• Delete subject: allows you to erase a selected subject.
• Duration (5 sec) (only in MMS): allows you to change the duration of the
image slideshow.
• Layout (bottom) (only in MMS): allows you to change the layout.
• Add recipients: allows you to enter additional recipients to the
message.
• Delete messages: allows you to erase either select specific message
bubbles or all current messages bubbles.
• Save messages: allows you to save selected message bubbles.
• Discard: closes the current open message.

Adding attachments to a message
To add an attachment to your message, tap
(Attach) and select
one of the following options:
• Images: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list to add
it to your message.

• Take picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take a photo
with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by tapping Save.

• Video: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list, then
add it to your message.

• Capture video: allows you to temporarily exit the message, record a
video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it to your message
by tapping Save.

Messages

155

• Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the Audio list,
then add it to your message by tapping the circle to the right of the
audio so that it turns green, then tapping OK.

• Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message and record an
audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then automatically attached
to the message.

• S Memo: allows you to add an S Memo that you have created.
• Calendar: allows you to add an event from your calendar.
• Location: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing your
location.

• Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry, then
add it to your message by tapping Done.

Adding Additional Text
You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and events from
your Contacts, Calendar, or a Memo.
1. While composing a message, press
➔ Add text.
2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:
• S Memo: allows you to insert text from an existing S Memo.
• Calendar: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a calendar
event to your message.
• Contacts: allows you to add the name and phone number of any of your
contacts to your message.
• Text templates: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and sentences.
For more information, refer to “Text Templates” on page 165.
The information is added to your message.
156

Viewing Newly Received Messages
When you receive a message, your phone notifies you by displaying
within the Notification area at the top left of your Home
screen.
To read a message:
1. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For more
information, refer to “Notification Bar” on page 47.
– or –
From the Home screen, tap
then tap the new message to
view its contents. The selected message displays on the
screen.
to play a multimedia message.
2. Tap
• To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap

3. In a single motion, touch and drag up or down the page to
scroll through the message (if additional pages were added).

Messages

157

Message Threads
Sent and received text and picture
messages are grouped into message
threads. Threaded messages allow
you to see all the messages
exchanged (similar to a chat
program) and displays a contact on
the screen.

Current Recipient

My Text

Message threads are listed in the
order in which they were received,
with the latest message displayed at
the top.
To reply to a text message:
1. From the Home screen, tap

.
2. While the message is open, tap
the Enter message field and
then type your reply message.

Reply Bubble
Text Message Thread

3. Compose your reply.
Your texts are colored Blue and your caller’s replies are Yellow.
4. Tap
– or –

(Send) to deliver your reply.

Press
and then select one of the available message
options (page 153).

158

To access message thread options:

From the main Messaging screen, touch and hold the message
to display the following options:
• View contact: displays the Contact’s Overview page.
• Add to contact: begins the process of adding the new number to your
Contacts list.
• Delete thread: deletes the currently selected message thread.
• Save messages: allows you to select available messages for storage
and archiving. Select the desired messages and tap Save.

To access additional Bubble options:

Touch and hold the message bubble within an active message
conversation to display the following options:
• Delete message: deletes the currently selected message bubble from
the thread.
• Copy message text: copies the currently selected message bubble
from the thread.
• Lock/Unlock message: locks or unlocks the currently selected
message bubble from being accidentally deleted.
• Forward: allows you to forward the currently selected message bubble
to an external recipient.
• Save message: allows you to save a selected message bubble.
• View message details: displays details for the currently selected
message bubble.

Messages

159

Deleting Messages
Deleting a single message thread
1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Touch and hold a message from the Messages list, then select
Delete thread.
3. At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit.

Deleting multiple message threads
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press

and then tap Delete threads.

3. Tap each message thread you want to delete. A checkmark
displays beside each selected message.
4. Tap Delete.
5. At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to end the process.

Deleting a single message bubble
1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Open a message to reveal the message string.
3. Touch and hold a message bubble, then select Delete message.
4. At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit.

Deleting multiple message bubbles
1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Open a message to reveal the message string.
3. Press

and then tap Delete messages.

4. Place a check mark on the individual bubbles targeted for
deletion or choose Select all.
160

5. Tap Delete to erase or Cancel to exit.

Message Search
You can search through your messages by using the Message
Search feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Press

and then tap Search.

3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in which
.
to search, then tap
4. All messages that contain the entered search string display.

Messaging Settings
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia messages,
Voice mails, and Push messages.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press

and then tap Settings.

The following Messaging settings are available:
Display
• Bubble style: allows you to choose from several bubble styles for your
messages. Bubbles are the rounded boxes that surround each
message.
• Background style: allows you to choose from several background styles
for your messages.
• Use the volume key: allows you to change the text size by using the up
or down volume keys.

Messages

161

General settings
• Restore messages: restores previous saved messages to your inbox.
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is reached,
rather than overwriting them.
• Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text
messages are allowed in one conversation.
• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many
multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation.
• Text templates: provides access to the text templates.
Text message (SMS) settings
• Auto combination: when this option is activated, multi-segment
messages are re-assembled show they can be shown as a single
message.
Multimedia message (MMS) settings
• Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to automatically retrieve
messages.
• MMS alert: alerts you when the messaging modes changes from an
SMS (text) to MMS (multimedia) mode.
• Group conversations: when this option is activated, the device sends
messages as a group conversation.
Notification settings
• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your status
bar.
• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your message
notifications.

162

• Vibrate: allows you to configure the vibration mode associated with
message alerts.
• Message alert repetition: allows you to set the interval for new
message alerts. Choose from: Once, Every 2 minutes, or Every
10 minutes.
• Preview message: when enabled, allows you to view a brief preview of
new message text on the Status bar.
Emergency message settings
• Emergency alerts: allows you to configure emergency alert settings.
You can enable/disable those alert categories you wish to receive.
Choose from: Imminent extreme alerts, Imminent severe alert, and
AMBER alerts.
Note: The Presidential alert can not be disabled.
• Emergency notification preview: allows you to play a sample
emergency alert tone. Tap Stop to cancel the playback.
• Vibrate: when enabled, this activates vibration for emergency alert
notification.
• Alert reminder: when activated, sets the alert reminder interval. Choose
from: Once, Every 2 minutes, Every 15 minutes, or Off.
Signature settings
• Add signature: when enabled, this feature allows you to create a
signature at the end of your outgoing text messages.
• Signature text: allows you to enter a desired signature for your
message.
Messages

163

Emergency Alert Configuration
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from
the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS); which may also be
known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network (PLAN). If your
wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are
available while in the provider's coverage area. If you travel outside
your provider's coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be
available. For more information, please contact your wireless
provider.
Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive
geographically-targeted messages. Alert messages are provided by
the US Department of Homeland Security and will alert customers of
imminent threats to their safety within their area. There is no charge
for receiving an Emergency Alert message.
There are three types of Emergency Alerts:
• Alerts issued by the President
• Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life
• AMBER Alerts (missing child alert)
Customers may choose not to receive Extreme Alerts, Severe Alerts,
and AMBER Alerts.
Important! Alerts issued by the President can not be disabled.
To disable Extreme, Severe, and AMBER Alerts:
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Press

and then tap Settings.

3. Scroll to the bottom and select Emergency alerts. All alerts are
enabled by default (checkmark showing).
164

4. Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove the
checkmark.

Text Templates
This screen displays your available text message reply templates.
This is a readily accessible list of both default and user-defined text
snippets that can be used to quickly reply to incoming messages.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
and then tap Settings ➔

2. From the Messaging list, press
Text templates.

3. Tap a message to immediately insert it into your current
message conversation.
To create your own text template:
1. From the Home screen, tap

2. From the Messaging list, press
Text templates.
3. Tap

and then tap Settings ➔

(Create text template).

4. Enter a new text string and tap Save.

Messages

165

Using Email
Email (or Internet Email) enables you to review and create email
using several email services. You can also receive text message
alerts when you receive an important email. Your phone’s Email
application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts
simultaneously in one convenient location.
There are currently three main types of email accounts on your
phone: Gmail, Internet-based email (Gmail, Yahoo, etc..), and
Microsoft Exchange (Corporate email or Outlook®).
To send and receive email messages through an ISP (Internet
Service Provider) account, or if you wish to use your device to access
your corporate email through a VPN (Virtual Private Network), you
will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account.
• IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) - This protocol is frequently
used in large networks and commercial settings. IMAP4 is the current
standard.

• POP3 (Post Office Protocol) - This protocol is supported by most ISPs
(Internet service providers) and common among consumer applications.
POP3 is the current standard.

• Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync - This protocol is frequently used with a
large corporate email server system and provides access to email,
contact, and calendar synchronization.

166

Creating an Internet Email Account
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Email).

2. If you already have other email account setup:
• Open an existing email account, press
and then tap Settings ➔
(Add new account).
– or –
Enter your Email address and Password information.
• Email address: your Internet email address.
• Password: typically your network access password
(case-sensitive).
3. Tap Show password to display the password as you enter it in
the associated field.
• Tap Manual setup to configure your connection settings manually
(POP3 or IMAP). Follow the on-screen prompts and enter the information
specific to your email provider.
4. Tap Next.
5. At the Account options screen, select the frequency which the
device should check for new email on the server and tap Next.
• Tap the Notify me when email arrives field to receive new email
notifications.
• Tap the Automatically download attachments when connected to
Wi-Fi field to assist with faster access to large email attachments when
using Wi-Fi.
6. At the Set up email screen, name the account and enter a
screen name to identify yourself on this account.
Messages

167

• The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from
other email accounts accessed by your device.
7. Tap Done to store the new account.
Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab. You can also
view Personal information for this account, Receipts (if you setup the
account to return receipts), Travel information, and more (if
available).

Opening an Email
1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Email).

2. Tap the account name field (upper-left) to open the complete
email account list page.
• Selecting Combined view allows you to view all the emails for your
current accounts, managed by the application, to be listed on a single
screen.
3. Select an email account and tap an email message.

Refreshing Email messages
1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Email).

2. Select an email account.
• If you are already in an email account, tap the account name field
(upper-left) to open the complete email account list page.
• Select an available email account.
3. Tap

168

(Refresh).

Composing Email
➔

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Email).

2. Tap the account name field (upper-right) to open the complete
email account list page.
3. Tap Inbox ➔

(Compose).

4. Enter the recipient’s email address in the To field.
• If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate the
email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message
recipients as you want.
5. Press
and then tap Add Cc/Bcc to add additional carbon
copy recipients.
• Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients.
• Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients.
6. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.
7. Tap the email text field and compose your email message.
• To add an attachment (such as image, video, audio, etc..),
tap
Attach (from the top of the screen) and make a category
selection.

– Tap the file you wish to attach.
– Tap
to delete the attached file.
Note: If you attach an image to your email, you have the option to
resize it prior to delivery. Choose from: Original,
Large (70%), Medium (30%), or Small (10%). Once chosen, tap
OK.
8. Once complete, tap

(Send).
Messages

169

Configuring Email Settings
1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Email).

2. Select an account.
3. Press

and then tap Settings ➔ .

4. Alter any of the following settings:
• Account name: displays your uniquely created account display name.
• Your name: displays the name used in the From field of your outgoing
email messages.
• Signature: Lets you attach a customized signature to the bottom of all
outgoing emails.

– In a single motion touch and slide the Signature slider to the right to turn
it on.

– Tap the Signature field, change the current text, and tap OK to save the
new signature.
• Default account: Assign this account as the default email account used
for outgoing messages.
• Always Cc/Bcc myself allows you to include your own email address in
either the CC, Bcc, or None fields. Lets you always receive a copy of
outgoing emails.
• Forward with attachment: Lets you include attachments when
forwarding an email.
• Recent messages: adjusts the number of on-screen messages shown
in the current category list at any one time.
• Show images: allows you to view embedded images located within the
body of the currently displayed email.
170

• Sync Email: enables automatic email synching between your device
and the remote server.
• Auto download attachments: allows the device to automatically
download email attachments when an active Wi-Fi connection is
detected. This process speeds up the process of downloading an emails
attachments for offline review by not using a 3G or 4G network
connection.
• Size to retrieve emails: configures the incoming email size allowed to
pass through to your phone automatically without user interaction.
Emails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved
manually.
• Auto resend times: enables the device to resend an outgoing email a
specified number of times if delivery fails.
• Sync schedule: allows you to control the email sync schedule on both
Peak and Off-Peak times.
• Email notifications: Activates the email notification icon to appear
within the Notifications area of the status bar when a new email (Gmail,
etc..) is received.
• Select ringtone: Plays a selected ringtone when a new email message
is received.
• Vibrate: Activates a vibration when a new email message is received.
• Incoming settings: Lets you specify incoming email settings, such as
User name, Password, IMAP server, Security type, Port, and IMAP path
prefix.

Messages

171

• Outgoing settings: Lets you specify outgoing email settings, such as
SMTP server, Security type, Port, Require sign-in, User name, or
Password.
Note: Some the above options may not be displayed when using some
Internet account types.

Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook)
Your phone also provides access to your company’s Outlook
Exchange server. If your company uses either Microsoft Exchange
Server 2003 or 2007, you can use this email application to
wirelessly synchronize your email, Contacts, and Calendar
information directly with your company’s Exchange server.

Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account
1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Email).

Note: If selected, the Manual setup button changes to read Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync. If activated, skip to step 6.
5. Tap Next. Consult your Network or IT Administrator for further
details and support.
6. Tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (from the add new email
account screen).
Note: If prompted with an on-screen notification that the connection
that the “Setup could not finish”, tap Edit details to continue
with a manual update of necessary information.
7. When prompted to provide additional detailed information
within the Exchange server settings screen, enter an updated
Domain, and confirm your user name and Password
information.
Important! Remember to manually place the cursor in the correct spot
and enter a Domain name before the “[Domain]\[user
name]” entry. Most servers only provide a username.
8. Update or re-enter your Exchange server information within the
appropriate field. This field can often be populated with
incorrect or out of date information provided by your server.
• Exchange Server: your exchange server remote email address.
Typically starts with mail.XXX.com. Obtain this information from your
company network administrator.
Messages

173

Important! Do not accept the default entry as this is a guess based on
returned information.
• If your network requires SSL encryption, tap the Use secure connection
(SSL) field to place a check mark in the box and activate this additional
level. Most often, this option should be enabled.
• If your network requires that you accept SSL certificates, tap the Accept
all SSL certificates field to place a check mark in the box and activate
this additional level. Most often, this option is not required. Confirm this
information with your IT Administrator.
Important! If your Exchange server requires this feature, leaving this
field unchecked can prevent connection.
9. Consult your IT Administrator if it is necessary to enable the
Use client certification option.
10. With the new server information entered, tap Next.
11. Read the on-screen Activation disclaimer and, when prompted,
tap OK. The device then verifies your incoming server settings.
12. If prompted, read the Remote security administration
information and tap OK to accept the service and continue.
13. Adjust the various on-screen configuration fields and tap Next.
It may take a few seconds for the next screen to load.
• Enabling the Automatically download attachments when
connected to Wi-Fi option decreases the wait time to access large
email attachments.
174

14. If prompted, read the Activate device administrator? screen and
tap Activate to complete the email setup process.
Note: This process can take a few minutes. If the previous setup
screen re-appears, ignore it and do not alter any fields during
this process.
15. Identify your new work email account with a unique name
(Ex: Work), then tap Done.

Opening an Exchange Email
1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Email).

2. Tap the account name field (upper-left) to open the complete
email account list page.
3. Select an exchange email account and tap an email message.

Refreshing Exchange Email
1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Email).

(Refresh).

Composing Exchange Email

For more information, refer to “Composing Email” on
page 169.

Messages

175

Deleting an Exchange Email Message

Touch and hold an email (from your inbox list) and select
Delete from the on-screen context menu.
– or –
With the email message displayed, tap

(Delete).

Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap Settings and
then navigate to the Accounts area.
2. Tap the Microsoft Exchange account and Settings ➔
.
– or –
From the current Email inbox listing, press
and then tap
Settings ➔ and specify the email
settings you wish to synchronize:
• Account name displays the name used by the device to track the
account.
• Signature: Lets you attach a customized signature to the bottom of all
outgoing emails.

– In a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on.
– Tap the Signature field, change the current text, and tap Done to save
the new signature.
• Default account: Assign this account as the default email account used
for outgoing messages.

176

• Always Cc/Bcc myself allows you to include your own email address in
either the CC, Bcc, or None fields. Lets you always receive a copy of
outgoing emails.
• Forward with attachment: Lets you include attachments when
forwarding an email.
• Show images: allows you to view embedded images located within the
body of the currently displayed email.
• Auto download attachments: allows the device to automatically
download email attachments when an active Wi-Fi connection is
detected. This process speeds up the process of downloading an emails
attachments for offline review by not using a 3G or 4G network
connection.
• Period to sync Email to assign the sync range for your incoming and
outgoing email messages between your phone and your external
exchange server. How many days worth of email messages should the
phone and server synchronize. Choose from: Automatic, All, 1 day,
3 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, or 1 month.
• Empty server trash: allows you to delete your email account’s trash bin
remotely.
• Sync schedule allows you to configure your email sync schedule.
• Folder sync settings allows you to configure the sync settings for
various folders such as Inbox, Drafts, Outbox, etc..
• Out of office settings allows you to both activate/deactivate your email’s
out of office settings, and configure both the start/end dates and your
outgoing message.

Messages

177

• Size to retrieve emails configures the incoming email size allowed to
pass through to your phone automatically without user interaction.
Emails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved
manually.
• Period to sync Calendar assigns a period for your phone to sync
calendar events. Choose from: 2 weeks, 1 month, 3 months,
6 months, or All calendar.
• Security options: allows you to enable several security options such as:
Encryption, Encryption algorithm, Sign, Sign algorithms, Email
certificates, and Security policy list. These security policies could restrict
some functions from corporate servers.

– Security policy list: lists the current email’s security policy. These
policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers.
• In case of sync conflict allows you to assign the master source on
emails. If there is a conflict with the current email sync you can assign
the server as the main source for all emails (Server has priority) or
assign the phone to be the main source and update the server
accordingly (Device has priority).
• Auto resend times enables the phone to resend an outgoing email a
specified number of times if delivery fails.
• Email notifications enables the phone to display a status bar icon when
new email messages have been received.
• Select ringtone assigns an audible ringtone when a new or upcoming
event is pending.
• Vibrate assigns a vibration when a new or upcoming event is pending.

178

• Exchange server settings provides access to the Domain\user name,
Password, and Exchange server settings.
• Sync Email synchronizes emails between your device and the remote
exchange server.
• Sync Contacts synchronizes the contacts between your device and the
remote exchange server.
• Sync Calendar synchronizes your exchange calendar entries between
your device and the remote exchange server.
• Sync Task synchronizes your exchange tasks entries between your
device and the remote exchange server.
3. Press

to return to the previous page.

Using Google Mail
Google Mail (Gmail) is Google’s web-based email. When you first
setup the phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized with
your Gmail account.

Signing into Google Mail
1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Gmail).

Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access
features such as Google Mail and Play Store.
2. Tap New if you do not have a Google account.
– or –
Tap Existing if you have a Google account.
The Inbox loads conversations and email.
Messages

179

Opening Gmail
1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Gmail).

2. Tap an existing email message.

Refreshing Gmail Mail

From within the Gmail message list, tap Gmail
(Refresh)
at the bottom of the screen to refresh the screen, send and
receive new emails, and synchronize your email with the Gmail
account.

Other Gmail Options
1. From the main Gmail Inbox screen, tap
(Labels) at the
bottom of the screen to set up and manage Labels for your
Gmail messages.
2. From the main Gmail Inbox screen, tap
(Search) at the
bottom of the screen to search through your Gmail messages.

Composing a Gmail Message
1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Gmail).

2. From the Gmail Inbox, tap
(Compose) at the bottom of
the screen to create a new message.
3. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.
Tip: Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a comma.
4. Press
copy.

and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind

5. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.
180

6. Tap the Compose email field and begin composing your
message.
7. Once complete tap

(Send).

Viewing a Gmail Message
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view the following
options located at the bottom of the screen:
• Archive
: archives the selected Email.
• Delete

: deletes the currently selected Email.

• Labels

: assigns a label to the current Email.

• Mark as Unread
: tags the current message as unread and returns
you to the Google Mail Inbox.
• Newer: swiping to the right displays newer Emails.
• Older: swiping to the left displays older Emails.
2. From within the active Gmail message, press
to select
one of the following additional options:
• Mark important/Mark not important: assigns the current email an
important status.
• Mute: mutes the conversation.
• Report spam: reports the Email message as spam.
• Report phishing: reports the Email message as a phishing email
attempt.
• Settings: allows you to configure the General, or Notification settings.
• Send feedback: sends feedback to Google.
• Help: launches the browser and displays Google Mobile Help
information.
Messages

181

Creating an Additional Gmail Account
1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Gmail).

2. Press
and then tap Settings ➔ ADD ACCOUNT and follow
the same steps as referenced in the previous section. For more
information, refer to “Signing into Google Mail” on page 179.

Hangouts
Previously known as Google Talk™, is an updated place to hangout,
share photos, and even video calls. This is a free Windows and webbased application for instant messaging offered by Google.
Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats area in your
Gmail account. This allows you to search a chat log and store them
in your Gmail accounts.
Note: Before using this application, you must first have an active
Gmail account available and be currently logged in.
1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Hangouts).

Note: If you are not already logged into Google, refer to the
instructions for signing in on page 179.
2. When prompted, read the on-screen information and confirm
your phone number is correct before using the application. Tap
Confirm.
Note: Confirming your phone number does not make it publicly
available.

182

Google +
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot
easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream to get
updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast messaging with
everyone in your Circles, or use Instant Upload to automatically
upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google+.
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information, refer to
“Creating a New Google Account” on page 22.
2. From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Google+).

3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google+.
– or –
Tap Add account to create another account.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.
5. Visit www.google.com/mobile/+/ for more information.

Messenger
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a
simple group conversation. When you get a new conversation in
Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your device.
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information, refer to
“Creating a New Google Account” on page 22.
2. From the Home screen, tap
– or –

(Apps) ➔

(Messenger).

From the Google+ application, select Messenger.

Messages

183

3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google+.
– or –
Tap Add account to create another account.
4. When prompted, follow the on-screen procedures to configure
the Sync contacts parameters.
5. When prompted, configure the photo backup parameters as
desired and tap Done.
6. Tap
from the upper-left of the screen and select from an
available list of features such as: Find People, Communities,
Hangouts, etc..
To create a new message:
1. Tap
from the upper-left of the screen and select
Messenger.
2. Tap

to start a new message.

3. In the upper text field, enter a name, email address, or circle.
4. In the bottom Type a message field, enter a message then tap
(Send).

184

Section 7: Multimedia
This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your
device, including the Camera/Camcorder, Music Player, Samsung
Link, and how to manage your photos, images and sounds.
You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-in
camera functionality. Your camera produces photos in JPEG format.
Important! Do not take photos of people without their permission.
Do not take photos in places where cameras are not
allowed.
Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with
another person’s privacy.
Note: An SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot video
since there is already built-in storage.

Assigning the Default Storage Location
Important! Too many users can overlook this storage location until
something goes wrong. It is recommended that you verify
this location or change it before initiating the use of the
camera or camcorder features.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. From the viewfinder screen, tap
to the Storage entry.

(Apps) ➔

(Camera).

(Settings) and scroll up

Multimedia

185

3. Tap this entry and select the desired default storage location
for newly taken pictures or videos. Choose from: Phone or
Memory card.
Note: It is recommended that you insert an external microSD card and
then set the option to Memory card.
4. Press

to return to the Home screen.

Using the Camera
Taking Photos
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as simple as
choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then pressing the camera
key.
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions,
shadows may appear on the photo.
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Camera).

2. Using the device’s main display screen as a viewfinder, adjust
the image by aiming the camera at the subject.
Note: Use either the Up and Down volume keys or spread/pinch the
screen to zoom in or out. For more information, refer to
“Navigating Through the Screens” on page 55.
3. If desired, before taking the photo, use the left area of the
screen to access various camera options and settings.

186

4. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to a desired area
of interest.
5. Press
(Camera) until the shutter sounds. (The picture is
automatically stored within your designated storage location
(page 185). If no microSD is installed, all pictures are stored on
the Phone.) For more information, refer to “Camera Options”
on page 188.
Note: Touch and hold
to take a burst shot. These are saved using
a Fine image quality.
Self-portrait

Camera/Camcorder
Focus area
mode
Storage/Charge

Flash

Settings
Shooting
Effects
mode

Image viewer
Camera/Camcorder
button

Multimedia

187

Camera Options
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the screen.
The following shortcuts are available for the camera:
Focus area: displays the area of the image used as the
main focus area.
If the image is too close, the square will turn red.
Self portrait: allows you to set the front camera so you
can take pictures of yourself.
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or Auto
flash.
Shooting mode: allows you to set the shooting mode to
one of the following:

• Single shot: takes a single photo and view it before
returning to the shooting mode.

• Best photo: takes a series of photographs
simultaneously, then allows you to cycle through the
available thumbnails and choose the best photo to keep.
Tap Done to select the photo.

• Best face: takes a series of photographs simultaneously,
then allows you to cycle through the available
thumbnails and choose the best photo showing the
subject’s best face. Tag subject from the image, tap a
desired image, and select Save to store the photo.

188

Shooting mode (continued):

• Face detection: adjusts the camera focus based on face
detection technology.

• Panorama: takes a landscape photo by taking an initial
photo and then adding additional images to itself. The
guide box lets you view the area where the second part
of the panoramic picture should fall within.

• Share shot: uses Wi-Fi Direct to share your pictures
quickly with your friends. For more information, refer to
“Enabling Share Shot” on page 198.

• HDR: takes pictures in HDR (High Dynamic Range) mode
to increase image detail.

• Buddy photo share: uses face recognition from pictures
in your contacts to send your friends or family pictures
of themselves.

• Beauty: adjusts the contrast to smooth facial features.
• Smile shot: the camera focuses on the face of your
subject. Once the camera detects the person’s smile, it
takes the picture.

• Low light: adjusts the aperture and light settings to take
better images in low light conditions.
Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply
special effects to the photo. Options include:
No effect, Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize,
Green point, Blue Point, Red-yellow point, Washed out,
Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, or Negative.
Multimedia

189

Share shot - Share with: lists the current participants
sharing images with you via an active Share shot
session.
Share shot - Shooting mode: denotes the current shooting
mode is set to the Share Shot mode.
Settings:
Edit shortcuts: allows you to set shortcut icons for the
settings that you use the most.
Burst shot: allows several photographs to be captured in
quick succession by touching and holding the Camera
button.
GPS tag: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also known as
Geo-tagging). The location of where the picture
is taken is attached to the picture.
Self-portrait: allows you to set the front camera so you can
take pictures of yourself or video chat.
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or
Auto flash.
Shooting mode: allows you to set the shooting mode. For
more information, see Shooting mode description.

190

Settings (continued):
Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply
special effects to the photo. Options include:
No effect, Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize,
Green point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out,
Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, and Negative.
Scene mode: allows you to set the Scene to help take the
best pictures possible. Options include None, Portrait,
Landscape, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow, Sunset,
Dawn, Fall Color, Text, or Candlelight. Helpful tips are shown
for each scene mode at the bottom of the display screen.
Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness level
by moving the slider.
Focus mode: allows you to set this option to Auto focus or
Macro. Use Auto focus for all other focal situations.
Timer: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait
before taking a picture. Options include: Off, 2 sec,
5 sec, and 10 sec.

Multimedia

191

Settings (continued):
Resolution: allows you to set the image size to either:
8M (3264x2448), W6M (3264x1836), 3.2M (2048x1536),
W2.4M (2048x1152), W0.9M (1280x720), or 0.3M
(640x480).
White balance: allows you to set this option to one of the
following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent,
or Fluorescent.
ISO: ISO determines how sensitive the light meter is on
your digital camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, 400,
or 800. Use a lower ISO number to make your camera
less sensitive to light, a higher ISO number to take
photos with less light, or Auto to let the camera
automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.
Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures or
meters the light source: Matrix, Center-weighted, or Spot.
Auto contrast: provides a clear image even under backlight
circumstances where intensity of illumination can vary
excessively.
Guidelines: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.

192

Settings (continued):
Auto share shot: when used in conjunction with
S Beam, allows you to quickly share images with others.
Anti-Shake: compensates for camera movement.
Contextual filename: (requires GPS tagging) allows you
to adjust the filename based on contextual information
such as your current GPS location.
Image quality: allows you to set the image quality to:
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.
Storage: allows you to configure the default storage
location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory
card (if inserted).
Reset: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder
settings to the default values.
Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer
and the various viewing options for a selected picture.
The last picture you took, will be displayed as a
thumbnail in the Image viewer icon.
Camera button: takes a photo when pressed in Camera mode.

Multimedia

193

Camera Mode: allows you to take a photo in various modes.
Once you change the mode, the corresponding indicator
appears at the top left of the display. Slide the button up
for Camera, or down for Camcorder.

Storage location/Connection Status: indicates the device
is connected to an adapter and the current storage
location for images (Phone or Memory card)
on the device.

Adding a Name tag to an image
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press

(Apps) ➔

(Camera).

(Camera) until the shutter sounds.

3. Tap the Image viewer to view the image.
4. Tap a face on the image, tap the on-screen square and select
Add name.
5. Select an entry from your existing list of Contacts entries. An
on-screen bubble confirms the name was added.

194

Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options
After you take a photo or record a video, you can access various
options.
Photo viewing options
1. Tap a thumbnail to view the picture.
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the
picture, tap anywhere on the screen to display them.
2. The following options are available at the top of the screen:
• Favorites
: allows you to assign the current image as a favorite.
• Share via
: allows you to share the picture via Bluetooth, Email,
Gmail, Google+, Group Play, Hangouts, Messaging, Picasa, S Memo, or
Wi-Fi Direct.
• Delete

: allows you to delete the current picture.

3. Press
for additional options such as:
– Slideshow: allows you to see your photos in a slideshow.

– Face tag: allows you to activate/deactivate face recognition for use
with external social media applications.

– Tag buddy: allows you to assign tags to a subject in an image. These
tags are selected by the user on the Tag buddy menu that appears
once the feature is selected. Choose from: Weather, Location, Person,
or Date.
Note: The Tag buddy - Date information is displayed only when other
tags are shown.
Multimedia

195

– Add/Edit weather tag: allows you to edit an existing or assign a new
weather tag that is then saved to the current file.

– Copy to clipboard allows you to copy one or more pictures to a different
folder.

– Rotate left: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a
counterclockwise direction.

– Rotate right: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a
clockwise direction.

– Crop: provides an on-screen box that allows you to crop the current
picture. Tap Done to update the image with the new dimensions or tap
Cancel to ignore any changes.

– Set as: allows you to assign the current image as a Contact photo, Home
screen, Lock screen, or Home and lock screens.

– Buddy photo share: allows you to share the current image with active
buddies.

– Print: allows you to print the current image on a compatible Samsung
printer.

– Rename: allows you to rename the current file.
– Scan for nearby devices: scans for nearby DLNA-compliant devices
that can receive or display the current image.

– Details: files details such as Title, Type, Time, Album, Size, Reolution,
etc..

196

Video viewing options
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the
picture, tap anywhere on the screen to display them.
1. Tap a video to select it.
2. Tap

to play the video.

3. Press

for additional options.

Sharing Pictures
Pictures are the best way of remembering the moment, but an even
better treat is to share them with others.
Two new features allow you to either instantly share a series of
pictures as they are taken or quickly share a picture without using
email or messaging.
• Share Shot is a great way to instantly share a series of pictures among a
group of users. The best example for this feature is having multiple users
instantly sharing each others pictures at a company or family gathering.
As each person takes a separate picture with their own device, they are all
pooled together and instantly appear in each user’s Gallery.
No more “Email your pictures to me later”. Each person walks out of the
event with all the pictures taken by everyone.
This method of image transfer requires that both devices have Wi-Fi Direct
active and be paired prior to use.
Note: You can only share a shot with other external users who also
have their Wi-Fi Direct feature active.

Multimedia

197

• S Beam Transfer uses the NFC (near Field Communication) feature found
on your device to transmit large files directly to another compatible device
by direct touch.
This method of image transfer requires NFC and S Beam to be enabled
prior to use.
For more information, refer to “Using S Beam to Share Pictures” on
page 201.

Enabling Share Shot
Share shot is a Wi-Fi Direct group sharing feature where multiple
users can Wi-Fi connect their devices and then all share each others
pictures in real-time. This is really useful in group events (ex: family
gathering or company party) where you don’t want to have to email
everyone later and make sure you all can share your pics at a later
date.
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Direct Setup and Settings” on
page 326.
The general process is:
• Enable Wi-Fi Direct communication
• Pair your device with other users
• Enable Share shot
To enable Wi-Fi Direct:
1. From the main Settings page, in a single motion touch and
slide the Wi-Fi slider to the right to turn it on. The slider color
indicates the activation status.
2. Tap Wi-Fi ➔ Wi-Fi Direct.

198

3. Tap Scan and select the single device name to begin the
connection process to another Wi-Fi Direct compatible device.
– or –
Tap Multi-connect ➔ Scan and select all the device names to
begin the connection process to these Wi-Fi Direct compatible
devices.
Note: The target device must also have Wi-Fi Direct service active and
running before it can be detected by your device.
4. Tap Done. The direct connection is then established. Confirm
appears in the Status bar.
5. When prompted to complete the connection, the recipient
should tap OK. Your status field now reads “Connected” and
your connected device is listed within the Wi-Fi Direct devices
listing.
6. Each partner (including yourself) must then tap Accept to
consent to the new Wi-Fi Direct pairing.
To enable Share shot on Camera:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Mode) ➔ Share shot.

(Camera) ➔

(Shooting

2. If you are prompted to activate your Wi-Fi Direct connection,
tap OK and follow the activation procedures for Wi-Fi Direct.

Multimedia

199

To configure your Share Shot options:
1. Confirm the Share Shot viewfinder is active (see below).
2. Confirm the Wi-Fi is actively sharing icon (
top of the viewfinder window.
3. Tap

) appears at the

(Share profiles with) to display list of current

participants.
• Stop sharing images with select participants by tapping their entry and
removing the green check mark.
4. Tap

(Shooting modes) to display list of currently available

shooting modes from within Share Shot.
5. Tap

(Settings) to disable share shot while maintaining a

Wi-Fi Direct connection.
To take share shot images:
1. Press
(Camera key) until the shutter sounds.
(Gallery) to
2. From the recipients’ device, navigate to the
locate your newly shot images located in their default storage
location.
• External users will be able to locate their images in either a downloaded
or RECV (received) folder.
3. Confirm

(Share shot images delivered/received) appears

in the recipients’ Notifications area of the screen.

200

Using S Beam to Share Pictures
This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam large files
directly to another compatible device that is in direct contact. These
files can be larger, such as Videos, HD pictures, and other large
files.You can beam images and videos from your gallery, music files
from your music player, and more.
1. From the main Settings page, tap More settings.
2. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide the
NFC slider to the right to turn it on.
3. Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on.
4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide the
S Beam slider to the right to turn it on.
5. On the source device (containing the desired image or video),
(Gallery).
tap
(Apps) ➔
6. Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the preview
window.
Important! Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying the
Lock screen. They must both be active and unlocked. It is
recommended that the target device be on the Home
screen.

Multimedia

201

7. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back to
begin (1).
Note: If the Touch to beam screen does not appear on the source
device:
- Pull them apart
- Verify the image is visible in the preview window on
the source device (providing the file)
- Place them together again
8. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image
preview to begin the transfer (2). After a few seconds
(depending on file size) the recipient with then see the
transferred file displayed on their screen.
Place device atop each other

Tap the source image

202

To share multiple pictures via S Beam:
1. On the source device (containing the desired image or video),
tap
(Apps) ➔
(Gallery).
2. Locate the selected folder.
3. Touch and hold the first image and place a checkmark on it
and all desired images.
4. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back to
begin.
5. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image
preview to begin the transfer (2).
6. When prompted, separate the two devices.

Camera Gallery Options
The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera
images.
(Gallery).
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
2. Select a folder location (ex: Camera) and tap an image to open
it.
– or –
Touch and hold an image to place a checkmark on the file and
select multiple files.
– or –
Tap the upper-right camera to begin taking pictures that are
placed in this folder.

Multimedia

203

3. Tap the on-screen image and use either of the following image
menu options:
• Favorites

: allows you to assign the current image as a favorite.

• Share via
: allows you to share the picture via Bluetooth, Email,
Gmail, Google+, Group Play, Hangouts, Messaging, Picasa, S Memo, or
Wi-Fi Direct.

– Group Play

: allows to share images directly with other Wi-Fi
connected participants via Group Play.

• Delete

: allows you to delete the current picture.

4. Press
to select additional options:
– Slideshow: allows you to see your files in a slideshow.

– Face tag: allows you to activate/deactivate face recognition for use
with external social media applications.

– Add/Edit weather tag: allows you to edit an existing or assign a new
weather tag that is then saved to the current file.

– Copy to clipboard: allows you to copy one or more pictures to a different
folder.
204

– Rotate left: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a
counterclockwise direction.

– Rotate right: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a
clockwise direction.

– Crop: provides an on-screen box that allows you to crop the current
picture. Tap Done to update the image with the new dimensions or tap
Cancel to ignore any changes.

– Set as: allows you to assign the current image as a Contact photo, Home
screen, Lock screen, and Home and lock screens.

– Buddy photo share: allows you to share the current image with active
buddies.

– Print: allows you to print the current image on a compatible Samsung
printer.

– Rename: allows you to rename the current file.
– Scan for nearby devices: allows you to look for DLNA -compliant
devices used to control streaming media.

– Details: files details such as Title, Type, Time, Time, Album, Size,
Reolution, etc..

Multimedia

205

Screen Sharing an Image via Group Play
Important! Verify all of your recipients are connected to the same
Wi-Fi.
(Apps) ➔

1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Open an image and tap

➔

(Gallery).

(Group Play)

3. Enter a security PIN and tap Done. This process makes sure
only desired recipients can view your shared image.
4. Recipients must launch Group Play on their devices. Your
device then waits for other connected recipients on the same
Wi-Fi network to accept the connection and enter the PIN on
their screens.
5. Other users will have to activate their Group Play functionality
and then select the current Group and enter the correct PIN
code.
You can now interact and draw with the on-screen image, users will
instantaneously see the same gestures and also be able to interact.
Note: The newly altered image (with markups and comments) can not
be saved, but you can take a screen shot of the current image
and save it to your Clipboard.
For more information, refer to “Using Gestures” on page 58.

206

Taking a Screen Shot
Also known as a screen capture, this feature allows you to mimic the
print screen function on most computers.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Motion.
2. Tap the desired on-screen motion option.
3. In a single motion touch and slide the Motion slider to the right
to turn it on.
4. Tap the desired on-screen motion option.
5. Although enabled by default, enable the Palm swipe to capture
field by placing a check mark in the adjacent field.
6. With the current screen showing the desired image, in a single
motion, place the side of your palm along the one side of the
device and then slowly swipe it in the opposite direction over
the screen.

Assigning an Image as a Contact Photo
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Gallery).

2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.
3. With the image displayed, press
Set as ➔ Contact photo.

and then tap

4. Tap a contact to make a selection.
5. Use the on-screen crop the image by dragging it around or out
from its corners.
6. Tap Done to store the new image.

Multimedia

207

Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Gallery).

2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.
3. With the image displayed, press

and then tap Set as.

4. Select one of the these options:
• Home screen assigns the current image to the home screen
background. This image is spread across all available screens.
• Lock screen assigns the selected image to the background for the lock
screen.
• Home and lock screens assigns the current image to both the Home
screen and Lock screens.
5. Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture. Touch
and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out to create a
cropped area.
6. Tap Done to assign the wallpaper image.
– or –
Tap Cancel to stop without updating the wallpaper image.

208

Using the Camcorder
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a camcorder
that also allows you to record, view, and send high definition videos.

Shooting Video
Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, it is
recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light
by having the light source behind you.
1. From the Home screen, tap
activate the camera mode.

(Apps) ➔

(Camera) to

2. Tap and slide the Camera mode button down to Camcorder
Mode.
3. Using the device’s main display screen as a viewfinder, adjust
the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject.
Note: Use either the Up and Down volume keys or spread/pinch the
screen to zoom in or out. For more information, refer to
“Navigating Through the Screens” on page 55.
4. Tap the Video key (
) to begin shooting video. The red light
will blink while recording.
5. Tap anywhere on the screen to re-focus the camera on that
object. The camcorder auto-focuses on the new target area.
6. Tap the screen then select
to turn on auto focus. This will
automatically focus the video based on the object at the middle
of the screen.
Multimedia

209

7. To capture an image from the video while recording, tap
This feature is not available while the anti-shake feature is
activated.
8. Tap the Stop key (
) to stop the recording and save the
video file to your Camera folder.
– or –
Tap the Pause key (

) to pause the recording.

9. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer, then tap
(Play) to playback your video for review.
10. Press

to return to the viewer.

Camcorder Options
You can change options using your keypad in capture mode. The
following short cuts are available:
Self portrait: allows you to activate the front facing camera
so you can take videos of yourself or video chat.
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On.
When you set the flash to On, it stays on continually while
you are taking a video.
Recording mode: allows you to set the recording mode to:
Normal, which is limited only by available space on the
destination location, Limit for MMS, which is limited by
MMS size restrictions.

210

Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply
special effects to the video. Options include: No effect,
Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize, Green point,
Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out, Cartoonify,
Black and white, Sepia, or Negative.
Settings:
Edit shortcuts: allows you to set shortcut icons for the
settings that you use the most.
GPS tag: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also
known as Geo-tagging). The location of where the video
is shot is attached to the file.
Self-recording: allows you to set the front camera so you
can take videos of yourself or video chat.
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On. When
you set the flash to On, it stays on continually while you
are taking a video.
Recording mode: allows you to set the recording
mode to:

• Normal: is limited only by available space on the
destination location.

• Limit for MMS: is limited by MMS size restrictions.

Multimedia

211

Settings (continued):
Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply special
effects to the video. Options include:
No effect, Cold vintage, Warm vintage, Posterize, Solarize,
Green point, Blue point, Red-yellow point, Washed out,
Cartoonify, Black and white, Sepia, or Negative.
Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness level by
moving the slider.
Timer: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait
before taking a video. Options include: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and
10 sec.
Resolution: allows you to set the image size to either:
1920x1080, 1280x720, 720x480, 640x480, or 320x240.
White balance: allows you to set this option to one of the
following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent, or
Fluorescent.
Guidelines: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.
Anti-Shake: reduces image blur due to the movement of
the subject of the video or hand movement.
Contextual filename: (requires GPS tagging) allows you to
adjust the filename based on contextual information such
as your current GPS location.

212

Settings (continued):
Video quality: allows you to set the image quality to:
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.
Storage: allows you to configure the default storage location
for images or videos as either Phone or Memory card (if
inserted).
Reset: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder settings
to the default values.
Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer and
the various viewing options for a selected video. Image
viewer options are described in the following section.
The last video you took, will be displayed as a thumbnail
in the Image viewer icon.
Camcorder button: shoots or stops video recording when
pressed in Camcorder mode.
Live Shooting: takes a photo during a video recording
session in Camcorder mode.
Note: This feature is not functional when the Anti-Shake
feature is activated.

Multimedia

213

Camcorder Mode: allows you to shoot video.
Slide the button up for Camera mode or down for Camcorder
mode.

Storage location/Connection Status: indicates the device
is connected to an adapter and the current storage location
for videos (Phone or Memory card) on the device.

Accessing Videos
When you shoot a video, the file is saved in the Camera folder. You
can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in the
Camera folder.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Gallery).
2. Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin video
playback.
– or –
Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to select
the video (indicated by a colored border) and display the
following video menu context options:
• Favorites

: allows you to assign the current video as a favorite.

• Share via
: allows you to share the video via Bluetooth, Email,
Gmail, Google+, Messaging, Picasa, Wi-Fi Direct, and YouTube.
• Delete
or Cancel.
214

: allows you to delete the current video. Choose either OK

3. From within the Gallery, place a checkmark on the video and
press
for additional options such as:
– Slideshow: allows you to see your files in a slideshow.

– Tag buddy: allows you to assign tags to a subject in a video. These
tags are selected by the user on the Tag buddy menu that appears
once the feature is selected. Choose from: Weather, Location, Person,
or Date.
Note: The Tag buddy - Date information is displayed only when other
tags are shown.

– Rename: allows you to rename the current file.
– Scan for nearby devices: allows you to look for DLNA -compliant
devices used to control streaming media.

– Details: files details such as Title, Time, Width, Height, Orientation, File
Size, and Path.

Multimedia

215

The Gallery
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For
photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a slideshow,
set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as a picture
message.
Note: If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing
the Gallery, access Files and remove some of the media files
from the folders, and then open the Gallery.

Opening the Gallery

From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Gallery). For
more information, refer to “Camera Gallery Options” on
page 203.

Note: If you stored your files in folders (directories) on the storage
card, Gallery displays these folders as separate albums. The top
left album contains all the pictures in the storage card.

Viewing a Video within the Gallery
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Gallery).

2. Locate your folder and video.
3. Tap

(Play) to playback your video.

For more information on using the Picture-in-Picture feature for
video playback, see “Using Picture-In-Picture” on page 218.

216

Using the Video Player
The Video Player application plays video files stored on the SD card. This
device is able to playback DivX videos.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Video Player). A list of available videos displays in the
Video list.
2. Tap a video file to begin viewing.

Sharing Videos
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Video Player). After a few seconds, each
on-screen video begins to cycle through a preview of the first
five seconds of the clip.
2. Press

and then tap Share via.

3. Select either individual videos or tap Select all.
4. Click Done to complete the process or Cancel to quit.
5. Select a sharing option. Choose from: Bluetooth, Email, Gmail,
Google+, Messaging, Picassa, Wi-Fi Direct, and YouTube.

Multimedia

217

Using Picture-In-Picture
This feature can be used during playback of supported video types
via either the Gallery, Play Videos, or Video player.
Note: Some applications might not allow this video to remain active in
the foreground (ex: Camera/Camcorder screen).
This feature allows you to continue to view your video as a
background operation while you multi-task and do other things, such
as surf the Internet, access your Contacts list, look for a picture, etc..
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps).
2. Tap the desired video playback application (ex: Video Player).
3. Tap the desired video to begin playback.
Note: The Picture-In-Picture feature only works when using the Video
player application. Other video players (ex: YouTube), do not
support this feature.
4. As playback is initiated, locate and tap
(Picture-in-Picture) from the bottom-right of the playback
screen. Your current video is then sent to foreground of any
new page and most application screens.
5. The video disappears from the screen once it ends.

218

DivX Overview
This device is able to playback DivX videos. DivX Certified® to play
DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content. If you try to
play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device, the message
“Authorization Error” will be displayed and your content will not play.
Learn more at www.divx.com/vod.
Your device must first be registered to playback protected or
purchased DivX content. DRM-free or unprotected content does not
required DivX VOD registration.

Locating Your VOD Registration Number
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap Settings ➔
About device ➔ Legal information ➔ License settings ➔ DivX®
VOD ➔ Register.
2. Write down your Registration code.
3. Tap OK.

Multimedia

219

Register Your DivX Device for VOD Playback of
Purchased Movies
To play purchased DivX movies on your device, you will first need to
complete a one-time registration using both your device and your
computer.
1. Write down the DivX registration code that appears
on-screen. Copy this 8 or 10-digit number down.
2. Verify you have the latest DivX software running on your
computer. Download the free player (for your computer) from
www.divx.com.
3. Open the DivX Player on your computer and from within the
VOD menu, select Register a DivX Certified Device..
4. You are prompted to log in or create a DivX account if your
account information has not already been saved in DivX Player.
5. Follow the instructions in DivX Player to enter the registration
code from step 2 and create a device nickname (ex: “Pat or
Pat’s Device”).
6. Select a location on your computer to download the DivX
registration video with the same title as your device nickname
(ex: Pat.divx).
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the file and
initiate the transfer process. You will need to place this video
file onto your device and play it back.
8. Connect your device to the computer via USB and transfer this
video.

220

9. From the Registration screen (Transfer), click Transfer Video
now and select the location of the microSD card or USB (the
device) as the target destination for the registration video
(created in step 6) and click Start.
– or –
Locate the created file, copy and paste it into the new drive
letter corresponding to your device’s storage location.
10. From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(My Files).

11. Locate your registration DivX video file and tap the file to play
it. Once you play the registration file on your device, your
registration is complete.
12. Return to the DivX VOD Manager screen (from within your
computer’s DivX Player) and confirm both your computer and
your new device appears in the list of registered DivX devices.
Important! There is no special registration or configuration necessary
to playback DRM-free DivX movies. Registration of your
device is only required for playback of protected DivX
material.

Multimedia

221

Play Movies & TV
This application allows you to connect to the Play Store, download a
movie and then watch it instantly.
Choose from thousands of movies, including new releases and
HD titles in the Play Store and stream them instantly on your Android
device.
Movies, previously rented via the Play Store are automatically added to
your My Movies library across your devices.
Learn more about Google Play Movies at:
http://play.google.com/about/movies.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Play Movies & TV).
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so.
A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list.
3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and viewing
movies.
4. Tap the MOVIES tab to view movies you have rented.
5. Tap the TV SHOWS tab to view shows you have rented.
6. Tap the PERSONAL VIDEOS tab to view movies you have on your
device or memory card.
For more information on using the Picture-in-Picture feature for
video playback, see “Using Picture-In-Picture” on page 218.

222

Play Music
Also known as Google Music, allows you to browse, shop, and
playback songs purchased from the Play Store. The music you
choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and
instantly ready to play or download.

Access the new music tab from within your Play Store
application.

The Music application contains a music player that plays music and
other audio files that you copy from your computer.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Play Music).
The Music app searches both your online library and your
device’s internal storage for music and playlists; this can take
from a few seconds to several minutes, depending on the
amount of new music added since you last opened the
application. It then displays a carousel view of your new and
recent music, organized by album.
2. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to link your
current account to Google Play Music.
3. Tap an on-screen account to add it or select Add account to
use a new account.
4. At the free songs screen, select either Get free songs or Skip.
• Get free songs are downloaded via either the Internet or Play Store.
• Follow the on-screen download and installation instructions.
5. Swipe left or right to browse through your new and available
music. Music, albums, and artists are grouped into categories.
6. Tap an on-screen album to open it and begin playback.
Multimedia

223

7. Return to the Library screen from most other screens in the
Music application by tapping the Music application icon
(Music notification icon) at the top-left of the Application bar.

Changing Library View
You can change the way you view the contents of your library.
1. From the main Play Music page, and while in a selection or
screen, tap
(near the top-left of the Application bar) or
scroll left/right across the top of the screen to make a
selection.
2. Available tabs include: PLAYLISTS, RECENT, ARTISTS, ALBUMS,
SONGS, or GENRES.
Note: The contents of your library display in a scrolling grid or list
view, depending on the view.

224

Searching for Music in Your Library
1. From the main Play Music page, tap
through your available songs.

(Search) to search

2. Type the name of an artist, album, song, or playlist.
Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search box.
3. Tap a matching song to play it, tap a matching album, artist or
playlist to view a list of its’ songs.

Changing Music Settings

From the main Play Music page, press
and then make a
selection.
• Choose on device music: In addition to playing the music that you add
to your online library, you can play music stored on your device’s internal
storage. Then you can listen to music when you have no Internet
connection. To do this, make some of your online music available offline.
For more information, refer to “Making Online Music Available
Offline” on page 230.
• Settings: Provides access to the Play Music settings.
• Help: Displays application help information.

Listening to Music
You can listen to music by using your device’s built-in speakers,
through a wired headset, or through a wireless Bluetooth stereo
headset.
Press the volume keys on the side of the device to activate
on-screen volume control, then touch and drag on the scale to set
volume.
Multimedia

225

Playing Music

From the main Play Music page, tap a song in your library to
listen to it.
The Now playing screen opens and the song you touched or the
first song in the album or playlist starts to play. The tracks in
the current list play in order until you reach the end of the list
(unless you choose a repeat option). Otherwise, playback stops
only if you stop it, even when you switch applications.

Note: If you navigate away from the Now playing screen in the Music
application, the Now Playing bar appears at the bottom of the
screen.

226

Displaying the Now Playing Screen
If you navigate away from the Now playing screen, to return to the
Now playing screen from other Music screens:

Tap the name of the current song in the bottom Now Playing
bar.
– or –
If you have left the Play music app, in a single motion, touch
and drag
(Music notification icon) down from the Status
bar, then tap the song title from the Notifications area. You can
also pause and resume playback and skip to the next song in
the panel. For more information, refer to “Notification Bar” on
page 47.

Tab Options
There are various options available from the various tabs:

From the main Play Music page, select one of the following
tabs and tap
to access an available option.
• PLAYLISTS: Add to queue, Rename, or Delete.
• RECENT: to display the most recently played songs and albums
• ARTISTS: Add to queue, Add to playlist, or Shop for artist.
• ALBUMS: Add to queue, Add to playlist, More by artist, or Shop for artist.
• SONGS: Add to queue, Add to playlist, Shop for artist, or Delete.
• GENRES: Add to queue, Add to playlist, More by artist, or Shop for artist.

Multimedia

227

Options While Playing a Song
When you play a song, the Now playing screen displays. There are
various options and controls available while a song is playing:
1. From the main Play Music page, tap an album or song.
2. From the Now playing screen, press
(Menu) to display the
following options:
• Equalizer: applies selected equalizer features such as:
FX booster, Bass boost, and 3D effect.
• Clear queue: clears the current queue.
• Save queue: stores the current queue.
• Settings: Allows you to view and assign various music settings, and
view different application-specific information.
• Help: Provides an on-screen series of related help topics.
3. Tap
– or –

➔ Add to playlist to add the song to a playlist.
➔

Tap

➔ Add to playlist to add the song to a

playlist.
The Now playing screen contains several buttons that you can tap to
control the playback of songs, albums, and playlists:
Tap to go back to the previous song. Touch and hold to
scan backward through the current song.
Tap to resume playback.
Tap to pause playback.
228

Tap to advance to the next song. Touch and hold to scan
forward through the current song.
When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options, songs
play in random order. When disabled
(as shown), songs play in the order they appear
in List view.
When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options, songs
play in random order. When enabled, songs play in
random order.
Tap one of the icons shown here to either:
repeat the current song, repeat all songs, or disable
repeat mode.

Creating a Playlist
1. From the main Play Music page, tap an album or song list and
play a song.
2. From the Now Playing screen, tap

➔

adjacent to

the song name and select Add to playlist.
3. Tap New playlist ➔ Playlist name field to enter a name for the
playlist.
4. Tap OK to save the new playlist.

Multimedia

229

Adding Songs to Playlists
1. From the main Play Music page, tap an album or song list and
play a song.
2. From the Now Playing screen, tapap

➔

adjacent to

the song name and select Add to playlist.
3. Select the desired target playlist.

Playing a Playlist
1. From the main Play Music page, select the PLAYLISTS tab.
2. Tap a playlist title and select and entry from the list to begin
playback.

Deleting a Playlist
1. From the main Play Music page, and display the PLAYLISTS
library view.
2. Tap

next to a playlist title and tap Delete.

Making Online Music Available Offline
In addition to playing the music that you add to your online library,
you can play music stored on your device’s internal storage. Then
you can listen to music when you have no Internet connection. To do
this, make some of your online music available offline.
Tip: You can also copy music directly from your computer to your
device.

230

To make your online music available offline on your device:
1. From the main Play Music page, change your library view to
Albums, Artists, or playlists.
2. Press
and then select Choose on device music and tap the
album or playlist you want to make available offline.
A blue pin
offline.

indicates that the item is already available

Darker pins appear next to the items you can make available
offline. A bar at the bottom of the screen shows how much
space is available on your device for music and other files.
Dim blue pins indicate songs or albums that you copied
directly from a computer to your device.
3. Tap the dark pin next to each item you want to make available
offline or tap a blue pin to stop making it available offline. You
can switch to other views of your library to make other kinds of
items available offline as well.
4. Tap Done in the bar at the bottom of the screen.
5. The Music application starts downloading the items to your
device.

Multimedia

231

Music Player
The Music Player is an application that can play music files. The
music player supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+, eAAC+,
MP3, WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching the Music Player allows
you to navigate through your music library, play songs, and create
playlists (music files bigger than 300 KB are displayed).

Playing Music
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Music Player).

(Apps) ➔

2. Tap a library category tab to select the music category:
All, Playlists, Albums, Artists, Music square, or Folders.
3. Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback.
Note: The 5.1 channel sound effect works when earphones or sound
is connected through the headset jack only.
4. Use any of the following Music Player controls:
Pause the song.
Start the song after pausing.
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to
previous song.
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to
go to next song.
Volume control.
Plays the entire song list once.
232

Replays the current list when the list ends.
Repeats the currently playing song.
Shuffles the current list of songs randomly.
Songs play in order and are not shuffled.
Provides access to the Music square.
Lists the current playlist songs
Displays the current song in the player window
Provides access to the Equalizer

Making a Song a Phone Ringtone
1. From the main Music Player page, tap the All tab.
2. Touch and hold a song from the list to reveal the on-screen
context menu.
3. Tap Set as ➔ Phone ringtone.

Music Player Options
The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for
the music player such as whether you want the music to play in the
background, sound effects, and how the music menu displays.

With the Music player application displayed and playing a
song, press
and select one of the following options:
• Add to quick list: adds the current music file to the Quick list.
• Via Bluetooth: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth headset.
• Share via: allows you to share your music by using Bluetooth, Email,
Gmail, Group Play, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.
Multimedia

233

• Add to playlist: allows you to add the current music file to a selected
playlist.
• Details: allows you to view media info such as Artist, Title, Album, Track
length, Genre, Track number, Format, Size, and Location.
• Set as: allows you to set the current song as a Phone ringtone, Caller
ringtone, or Alarm tone.
• Scan for nearby devices: allows you to look for DLNA -compliant
devices used to control streaming media.
• Settings: allows you to change your music player settings.
• End: closes the application.

Music Player Settings
The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for
the music player such as whether you want the music to play in the
background, sound effects, and how the music menu displays.
1. From the main Music Player page, press
➔ Settings.
2. Select one of the following settings:
• SoundAlive: set a type of equalization such as Normal, Pop, Rock,
Dance, Jazz, Classic, etc.
• Play speed: set the play speed anywhere between 0.5X and 2.0X using
the slider.
• Music menu: this menu allows you to select which categories you want
to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres, Music square, Folders,
Composers, Years, Most played, Recently played, or Recently added.
Tap each item that you want to display in the Music menu.
• Lyrics: when activated, the lyrics of the song are displayed if available.
234

• Music auto off: when activated, music will automatically turn off after a
set interval.

Using Playlists
Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback.
These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this device,
or using a third-party application (such as Windows Media Player)
and downloading those files to an SD card inserted into the device.

Creating a Playlist
1. From the main Music Player page, tap the Playlists tab.
2. Press

and then tap Create playlist.

3. Backspace over the default playlist title and type a new name
for this playlist, then tap OK.

Adding Music to a Playlist
1. From the main Music Player page, tap the Playlists tab.
2. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.
3. Press
– or –

and then tap Add.

Tap
(Add music). This option is available within
user-created playlists.
Note: If a playlist is empty, add a song by touching a holding a song
name from the main screen to open the context menu. Select
Add to playlist and choose the playlist.
4. Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music tracks to
this playlist then tap Done.
Multimedia

235

Removing Music from a Playlist
1. From the main Music Player page, tap the Playlists tab.
2. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.
3. Touch and hold a song to reveal the on-screen context menu.
4. Tap Remove.

Editing a Playlist
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you can also
share, delete, or rename the playlist.
Note: Only those playlist you have created can be edited. Default
playlists can not be renamed.
1. From the main Music Player page, tap the Playlists tab.
2. Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on-screen context
menu.
3. Tap Edit title.
4. Enter a new name for this playlist and tap OK.

Transferring Music Files
Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two
methods:
1. Downloaded to the device from the Play Store.
Music files are directly stored on your phone.
2. Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection.
Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card.

236

Removing Music Files
1. From the main Music Player page, tap the All tab.
2. Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on-screen context
menu.
3. Tap Delete ➔ OK. The music file(s) is deleted.

Samsung Link
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung device with
your TV, streams content and even keeps tabs on who calls or sends
text messages with real-time, on-screen monitoring. Samsung’s
Link makes staying connected easy.
Allows users to share their in-device media content with other
external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living Network
Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also be DLNAcompliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital
multimedia streamer.
Important! You must first connect both of your communicating devices
to the same Wi-Fi and be using an active/registered
Samsung account prior to using this application.
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi settings” on
page 321.
For more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung
Account” on page 25.
Note: For more information on defining the various feature definitions,
see page 285.

Multimedia

237

Important! The Samsung account manages the access information
(username/password) to several applications, such as
Samsung Link, Chat On, and Samsung Hub.
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account.
There should be no
icon in the Notifications area of the
screen.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(Samsung Link).

(Apps) ➔

3. If prompted with an on-screen notification about no Wi-Fi
detected, tap Cancel (to continue by using your network
connection) or Connect to continue.
4. Tap Sign in.
5. If prompted to log into your Samsung account, tap Sign in and
follow the on-screen instructions.
Note: If the main screen still shows a Sign in box, close the application
and restart it.
6. Follow the on-screen prompts.
• Scroll across the application screen to view either
MY RECENT CONTENT or DEVICES & STORAGE.
The DEVICES & STORAGE screen contains two separate streaming
media options:
• Registered storage: allows you to receive and playback media stored
externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device by allowing you to
add a Web storage service for streaming content.
238

• Registered devices allows you to stream/share selected multimedia
content from your device to DLNA compliant device connected to the
same Wireless Access Point.

Configuring Samsung Link Settings
The Samsung Link™ application must first be configured prior to its
initial use. You must setup parameters such as connected Wi-Fi,
Items to share, source server address, and external device
acceptance rights.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Samsung Link) ➔ DEVICES & STORAGE.
2. Press
and then tap Settings and configure the following
settings as desired:
• Registered storage: allows you to add a Web storage location. Without
a storage service/location added, you will not be able to use Samsung
Link.
• My device: displays your device name as it is used with Samsung Link.
Tap to change the device name.
• Save to: allows you to save your media to your internal phone memory
or to an SD card.
• Auto upload: allows you to enable automatic upload of images from
your device to those storage locations specified within the Web storage
list. Move the slider to the on position to activate the feature.
• Video optimization: allows you to setup the video quality for streamed
video content. Move the slider to the on position to activate the feature.

Multimedia

239

• Password lock: allows you to restrict access to Samsung Link by
requiring a user enter the currently active and associated Samsung
account password. Move the slider to the on position to activate the
feature.
• My account: displays Samsung account information.
• Customer support: allows you to contact the Samsung Link team via a
new email from an available email account.
• About this service: displays application information.

Setting Up Web Storage
Web storage services allow you to use storage space to store your
files and share them on the “Cloud”.
Note: If you are using another Web storage service, log into that
service first before using Samsung Link.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Samsung Link) ➔ DEVICES & STORAGE.
Note: When adding storage, an N Drive is added.
2. If not already signed into your Cloud storage, tap
(Register storage) ➔ Sign in to your desired service. Choose
from: SugarSync, Dropbox, or SkyDrive.
– or –
Press

240

and then tap Settings ➔ Registered storage ➔
(Register storage).

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to register or log into your
cloud service.
4. Once the process is successfully completed, the Web storage
icon or name appears in the Web storage area of the main
screen.
5. From the main screen, select a connected device and then tap
on the media that you would like to share.
• A file with
in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely on a Web
storage location. Selecting this media causes your device to access the
file currently stored on your services’ servers.
To de-register Web storage service:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Samsung Link) ➔ DEVICES & STORAGE.
Press
and then tap Settings ➔ Registered storage ➔
Deregister.
2. Select a current storage service and tap OK.

Sharing Media via Samsung Link to a Target Device
Important! Make sure all communicating devices are connected to the
same Wi-Fi.
1. Launch AllShare Play/Samsung Link on the target device (such
as an Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc..).
2. From the Home screen, tap
(Samsung Link).

(Apps) ➔

Multimedia

241

Note: You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before you can
use this feature.
3. Tap your device name from the Registered devices area.
4. Tap an available category tab (Pictures, Music, Movies, or
Files) and select a file.
• Touch and hold to select multiple files.
• A file with
in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely on a Web
storage location. Selecting this media causes your device to access the
file currently stored on your services’ servers.
5. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to place a
green check mark alongside it.
6. Tap
screen.

(Stream to connected devices) from the bottom of the

7. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to select it and
then select an available target device to begin streaming.
8. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the
on-screen Allow button to continue.
Note: At this stage your device is requesting access to share media
with the external source.
9.

Confirm
(Nearby devices) appears in the Notification
area at the top of the device to indicate you are using your
device as the media source.

242

AllShare Cast Hub
This hardware allows you to enjoy what’s currently on your device
directly on your TV.
Note: There is no need to be connected to a Wi-Fi network or to be
logged into your Samsung Account to use this feature.
AllShare Cast Hub establishes a WI-Fi Direct connection
between the device and the hub

Connecting AllShare Cast Hub
To connect your AllShare Cast Hub hardware:
AllShare Cast (with This feature functions with an
Hub accessory)
external AllShareCast Hub to fully
mirror what is currently displayed on your
device to the external TV.

AllShare Cast Hub

Status LED

RESET button

HDMI

Travel Adapter (Power)
Multimedia

243

1. Connect the AllShare Cast hub to a power source via the USB
Travel Adapter.
Note: The status LED begins to blink solid red to indicate it has begun
the start up process.

LED Color/Patterns

Description

Red - Solid

Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is booting or
processing.

Red - Blinking

Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is in standby
mode (ready for connection).

Blue - Solid

Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is ready to be
connected with a new device.

2. Connect your TV to the AllShare Cast Hub via an HDMI cable
(A-to-A cable) as shown above.
3. Change the source input on your TV to match the input port
used by the incoming HDMI cable.
Note: The television screen should now display an on-screen tutorial
showing you how to configure your device’s AllShare Cast Hub
and device settings.

244

To activate AllShare Cast on your device:
1. From the Home screen, press
More settings ➔ AllShare Cast.

and then tap Settings ➔

2. If not already on, touch and slide the AllShare Cast slider to the
right to turn it on. The slider color indicates the activation
status.

Pairing AllShare Cast Hub
To pair your device and Hub for the 1st time:
1. Locate the AllShare Hub (dongle) name displayed at the bottom
of the TV (showing the tutorial). Ex: Name: Dongle - XXXXXX.
2. Access your device’s AllShare Cast screen and locate the same
hub/dongle name in the list.
• Tap Scan if your AllShare Cast Hub (dongle) does not appear in the list.
3. Verify your AllShare Cast Hub is on (blinking red LED) and the
on-screen tutorial is displaying on the connected TV.
Note: The AllShare Cast Hub communicates with your paired device
via a Wi-Fi Direct connection.
4. For a first time connection:
• Press the RESET button (located at the rear of the hub) once and only for
a second until the LED turns solid BLUE.
• Quickly tap the hub name entry on your device’s AllShare Cast screen.
5. Verify
(AllShare Cast Hub Communicating) appears at the
top of the device’s screen.

Multimedia

245

6. Confirm the connection by making sure both your TV and
device show the same image/screen and
(Wi-Fi Direct
Communicating) now displays on the device.
Important! The AllShare Cast Hub is a 1-to-1 connection. If a previous
device was paired to the Hub and is still connected to the
AllShare Cast Hub, you can not pair a new device until the
first connection is stopped.
To disconnect your device from the hub:
1. Access your device’s AllShare Cast screen and locate the
current connection.
2. Tap the entry and select End connection.
To reconnect your device again to an existing hub:
1. Locate the AllShare Hub (dongle) name displayed at the bottom
of the TV (showing the tutorial). Ex: Name: Dongle - XXXXXX.
Important! Verify the LED is not a solid blue. This indicates there is
another device currently connected.
2. Access your device’s AllShare Cast screen and tap the same
hub/dongle name in the list.
3. Confirm the connection by making sure both your TV and
device show the same image/screen.

246

YouTube
YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and
share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.
(YouTube).
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
2. When the screen loads you can begin searching and viewing
posted videos.
3. Press
➔ Settings ➔ General ➔ High quality on mobile if
you prefer high quality output.

Multimedia

247

Section 8: Applications and
Development
This section contains a description of each application that is
available in the Applications Menu, its function, and how to navigate
through that particular application. If the application is already
described in another section of this user manual, then a cross
reference to that particular section is provided.
Note: This manual only addresses applications that have been loaded
on your [device/computer/tablet] as of the date of purchase.
Information concerning third party applications that you may
choose to download from the Google Play Store or otherwise
should be obtained from the application provider directly.
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-used
applications to one of the Home screens. For more information,
refer to “Customizing the Screens” on page 71.
You can also add an application icon as a Primary Shortcut that
will display on all Home screens. If you add an application as a
primary shortcut, the application icon will not be displayed in the
Applications menu.

248

Applications
The Applications list provides quick access to all the available
applications on the phone.

Calculator

Using this feature allows you to use your device as a calculator. The
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,
subtraction, multiplication, and division. You can also use this as a
scientific calculator.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Calculator).
2. Enter the first number using the numeric keys.
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the Plus,
Minus, Multiplication, or Division key.
4. Enter the next number.
5. To view the result, tap the = (equals) key.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 as many times as required.
Note: Place the screen in Landscape mode to reveal additional
scientific functions.

Applications and Development

249

Calendar
With this feature, you can consult the calendar by day, week, or
month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a reminder. Google
Calendar is built into the phone and synchronizes both new and
existing entries between your phone and your online Google account.
Important! You should previously add an account (Facebook, Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync, or Google) prior to using the
Calendar.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
Tap
(Show More) to display these tabs:
• Year: displays the Year view.

(Calendar).

• Month: displays the Month view.
• Week: displays the Week view.
• Day: displays the Day view.
• List: displays the events in a List view.
• Task: allows you to search for tasks.
2. Tap
– or –

(Create event) to create a new Calendar event.

Tap Today to display the current date indicated by a blue box,
then press
and select one of the following options:
• Go to: displays a specific date.
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or an
individual event.
• Search: allows you to search within your current events.
250

• Sync: synchronizes your current calendar events with your available
accounts (such as Gmail, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, etc..).
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.

Creating a Calendar Event
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap

(Apps) ➔

(Calendar).

to access the various calendar tabs.

3. Within the Year, Month, Week, and Day tabs, tap
event).

(Create

Calendar Settings
Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with which you
want the calendar to begin. You also select how you want to view the
calendar, by Month, Week, or Day or determine how to manage
events, notifications, sounds, and defaults reminders.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
.
2. Press

➔ Settings.

3. Tap Month view styles and select a style: Calendar view + list or
Calendar view + pop-up.
4. Tap Week view and select a type: Timeline or Analog.
5. Tap First day of week and select either Local default, Saturday,
Sunday or Monday.
6. Tap Hide declined events to activate this option. A check mark
indicates selection.
7. Tap Lock time zone (to lock event time based on your current
user-selected time zone). Select a time zone from within the
Select time zone field.
Applications and Development

251

8. Tap Show week number to display the week numbers along the
side of the week entries.
9. Tap Calendars and select the type of general synchronization
settings you want. A check mark indicates selection.
10. Tap Set alerts & notifications to adjust the event notification
method. Choose from: Alert, Status bar notification, and Off.
11. Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar event
notification.
12. Tap Vibration to assign a vibration notification to this event.
13. Tap Default reminder time to assign a default time frame for
event reminders.
14. Tap Notifications while screen is off to display notifications on
the full screen while it is turned off.
15. Tap Quick responses to edit your default quick responses for
outbound emails. These are default responses similar to those
used by text templates.
16. Tap Swipe with two fingers to change the way events are
displayed when swiped.

252

Camera
Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG
format. The Camcorder shoots High Definition video in an MP4 format.
Note: A microSD card is no longer necessary before you take pictures
or shoot video.
It is recommended that you confirm your default storage
location for images and videos.

From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Camera).

Chrome
The Google Chrome app allows you to use the Google Chrome Web
browser on your device.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Chrome).
2. Read the Google Chrome Terms of Service and tap Accept and
Continue.
3. If you have an existing Chrome account, tap Sign in to bring
your open tabs, bookmarks, and data from your computer to
your phone, otherwise tap No thanks.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google Chrome.

Applications and Development

253

Clock
Here you can set an Alarm, configure and view the World clock, use
a Stopwatch, set a Timer, or use a Desk Clock. The applications
display in a tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a
finger.

From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Clock).

(Apps) ➔

(Clock).

Setting an Alarm
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap

(Create alarm).

3. Use the arrow symbols to enter adjust the hour, and minutes,
then tap AM or PM (toggles depending on which was last
selected).
4. Tap the Alarm repeat field and touch the number of times you
want this alarm to repeat. Selections are: day blocks or Repeat
Weekly. Selected day blocks turn blue when active.
5. Tap the Alarm type field and select one of the following:
Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, or Briefing.
6. Tap More to configure additional alarm settings such as
volume slider, Alarm tone, Snooze, Smart alarm, and assign a
Name.
To configure additional alarm settings:
1. Tap More to access additional alarm settings.
2. Slide the slider bar left or right in the Alarm volume field to
decrease or increase the alarm volume. A sample of the
volume level plays.
254

3. Tap the Alarm tone field and either select an available tone or
select Add to use locate a sound to use as an alarm ringtone.
Tap OK to activate the ringtone.
4. Move the Snooze slider to the right to activate the feature. Tap
the field to assign a Interval time
(3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, or 30 minutes)
and Repeat (1 time, 2 times, 3 times, 5 times, and 10 times).
• Interval indicates the length of time the alarm will remain silent between
alarm notifications (snooze time).
• Repeat indicates the numbers of snooze sessions that are assigned to
this alarm. How many times will the snooze silence the alarm.
5. Move the Smart alarm slider to the right to activate this feature
which slowly increases screen brightness and the volume of
nature tones to simulate dawn breaking.
Tap the field to assign a interval time (3 min, 5 min,
10 min, 15 min, or 30 min) and nature tone (Fairy fountain,
Birdsong by the lake, Sparkling mist, The secret forest,
Serenity, or Gentle spring rain).
• Interval category describes the length of time the alarm will remain
silent between alarm notifications (snooze time).
• Tone category provides one of several nature sounds that are used as
the alarm tone.
6. Tap the Name field and enter a name for this Alarm.
7. Tap Save to store the new alarm event.

Applications and Development

255

Turning Off an Alarm

To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and slide
direction.

to any

Setting the Snooze Feature

To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds, touch
and slide
to any direction. Snooze must first be set in the
alarm settings.

Deleting an Existing Alarm
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Clock).

2. Touch and hold an on-screen alarm event.
3. Tap Delete.

World Clock
This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of
world.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Clock).
2. Tap the World Clock tab.
3. Tap Add city then scroll and select the desired city, or tap in the
search field to locate a city.
To assign DST settings:
1. Locate a desired city from the World Clock list.
2. Touch and hold a city and select DST settings.
3. Select a DST setting (Automatic, Off, or 1 hour).
If Daylight Savings Time is selected, a sun symbol appears
next to the World Clock city listing.

256

Stopwatch
This feature allows you to capture elapsed time while letting the
stopwatch keep running.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Clock) ➔
Stopwatch tab.
2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch counter.
3. Tap Lap to begin the lap time counter.
4. Tap Stop to stop the counter.
5. Tap Restart to restart the lap counter. You can have multiple lap
times.
6. Tap Reset to reset the counter.

Setting a Timer
1. From the Home screen, tap
Timer tab.

(Apps) ➔

(Clock) ➔

2. Tap the Hours, Minutes, or Seconds field and use the
on-screen keypad to enter the hour, minute, or seconds. The
timer plays an alarm at the end of the countdown.
3. Tap Start to start the timer.
4. Tap Stop to stop the timer or Reset to reset the timer and start
over.
5. Tap Restart to resume the timer counter.

Applications and Development

257

Configuring a Desk Clock
This feature lets you activate an on-screen clock that can be viewed
when the device is docked.

From the Home screen, tap
Desk clock tab.

(Apps) ➔

(Clock) ➔

Contacts
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your
Contacts List is your phone’s built-in memory.

From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Contacts).

Downloads
Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current
downloaded files (Internet and Other).
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Downloads).
2. Tap an available file category tab (Internet downloads or Other
downloads) and select the desired file.

Email
Email enables you to review and create email using most email
services. The device alerts you when you receive an email message.

From the Home screen, tap

258

(Apps) ➔

(Email).

Gallery
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For
photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a slideshow,
set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as a picture
message.

From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Gallery).

Gmail
Google Mail (Gmail) is a web-based email service. Gmail is
configured when you first set up your phone. Depending on your
synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically synchronize with
your Gmail account on the web.

From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Gmail).

(Apps) ➔

(Google) and

Google
Use Google Search to search the Web.

From the Home screen, tap
enter the search text.
– or –

Tap
on the Google Search bar and say the search
information.

Applications and Development

259

Google Settings
As Google has become more intertwined with other applications, this
menu provides a quick and ready access point to configure
preferences for Google+, Maps & Latitude, Location, etc.. You can
also use the Search function to initiate a Google Search from this
menu.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Google Settings) and select an on-screen option.
2. Tap one of the following options: Apps with Google+ Sign in,
Google+, Play Games, Location, Maps & Latitude, Search, and
Ads.
Follow the on-screen prompts.

Google +
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot
easier.
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information, refer to
“Creating a New Google Account” on page 22.
2. From the Home screen, tap

260

(Apps) ➔

(Google+).

Group Play
This application lets you share documents, photos or music in
real-time with other connected friends.
Important! To share a Group Play, all users must be connected to the
same Wi-Fi access point.
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Group Play).

2. Read the various on-screen information and tap Next to
continue.
3. Follow the on-screen tutorials.
To share a picture with other Group Play users:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔

(Group Play).

2. Tap the available Wi-Fi indicated at the top and verify you are
connected to an active Wi-Fi. This must be the same Wi-Fi
being used by your external recipients.
3. Tap Share picture and then select a image by placing a green
checkmark on it and tapping Done.
4. Enter a PIN code and tap Done (to secure you session). Pass
this PIN along to all your recipients.
5. Your recipients must then:
• Launch the Group Play feature on their device.
• Tap the active Group Play session (shown at the bottom of the
application screen).
• Your recipients must enter the PIN code you created for the session.

Applications and Development

261

You can now interact and draw with the on-screen image, users will
instantaneously see the same gestures and also be able to interact.

From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Hangouts).

Help
Provides access to built-in Help information.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔

(Help).

2. Select an on-screen topics and follow the built-in navigations.

Internet
Open the browser to start surfing the web. The browser is fully optimized
and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the Internet browsing
feature on your phone.

From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

For more information, refer to “Internet” on page 293.

262

(Internet).

Local
Local (formerly known as Google Places) displays company logos on
a layer of Google Maps. When viewing an area you can quickly locate
a business or person, find out more information about the business,
see coupons, public responses, and more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Local).
2. Tap
(Search) and then use the Search Maps field to
manually enter a desired place or choose from among the
various categories. Matches are filtered by those closest to
your current location.
3. Locate and tap one of the listed options (Restaurants, Cafes,
Bars, Attractions, [user added searches],
RECOMMENDATIONS, or IN THIS AREA a list of places within
this category displays.
4. Tap the Maps icon to launch the related maps feature.
5. Press
and then tap Add a search. The functions adds
additional search shortcuts to the places screen.

Applications and Development

263

Maps
Google Maps allow you to track your current location, view real-time
traffic issues, and view detailed destination directions. There is also
a search tool included to help you locate places of interest or a
specific address. You can view locations on a vector or aerial map, or
you can view locations at the street level.
Important! Before using Google Maps you must have an active data
(3G/4G) or Wi-Fi connection. The Maps application does
not cover every country or city.

From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Maps).

Important! For best results, it is recommended that you enable all of
your location services. For more information, refer to
“Location Services” on page 360.

Enabling a Location source
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for
places of interest, you must enable a location source. To enable the
location source you must enable the wireless network, or enable the
GPS satellites.
Important! The more location determining functions are enabled, the
more accurate the determination will be of your position.
1. From the Home screen, press
Location services.
264

and then tap Settings ➔

2. Tap Use wireless networks allows apps to use data from
sources such as Wi-Fi and mobile networks to provide a better
approximation of your current location.
3. Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.
4. Tap Location and Google search to allow Google to use your
location data to improve your search results and other
services.
Tip: Enabling this feature allows you to locate places of interest at the
street-level. However, this also requires a clear view of the sky
and uses more battery power.

Opening Maps
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Maps).

2. Tap the upper-right My location button to find your location on
the map with a blinking blue dot.
3. Locate the bottom row of the buttons to access additional
options:
• Search: allows you to search for a place of interest.
• Directions: displays navigation directions to a location from a starting
point.
• Local: provides access to the places menu where you can quickly locate
a business or person, find out more information about a business, see
coupons, public responses, and more (Local). Locate and tap one of the
listed places (Restaurants, Cafes, Bars, Attractions, or select from
available categories such as Entertainment, ATMs, Gas stations, Hotels,
Post office, or Taxi.)
Applications and Development

265

• Layers: allows you to switch map views:

– Traffic: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic conditions are
displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color represents how fast
the traffic is moving.

– Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth. Satellite
images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best imagery
available, most of which is approximately one to three years old.

– Terrain: combines a topographical view of the area’s terrain with the
current map location.

– Transit Lines: displays the overlapping transit lines on your map.
– Latitude: allows you to see your friend's locations and share your location
with them.

– My Maps: displays a list of your preferred maps.
– Bicycling: displays the overlapping cycling trails on your map.
– Wikipedia: displays any Wikipedia markers and info on your map.
4. Press
and select one of the following options:
• Clear Map: allows you to remove all markings and layers from the map.
• Make available offline: allows you to store map-related information
locally on your device and access it even when the device is offline.
• Settings: allows you to select the following additional options:

– Display: allows you to enable/disable the Zoom Buttons, Scale Bar, and
Bubble action.

266

– Offline and cache: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map tiles when
not using Wi-Fi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles. Choose
from: Automatic caching, Clear all map titles, and Clear My Places cache.

– Location settings: lets you access and configure the location settings.
– Sign in: used to log into your existing Google account.
– Labs: this is a testing ground for experimental features that aren’t ready
for primetime. They may change, break or disappear at any time. Click on
a Lab to enable or disable it.

– What’s New: provides access to the Play Store from where you can
update the application manually.

– About: displays general information about Google maps such as Version,
Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received, Free memory, etc.

– Feedback: allows you to provide application feedback.
– Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions, Privacy
Policy, Legal Notices, or Web History information. Select the desired
information from the pop-up menu.
• Help: provides help information.

Applications and Development

267

Messaging
This application allows you to use the Short Message Service (SMS)
to send and receive short text messages to and from other mobile
phones.
You can also use the Multi Media Service (MMS) to create
multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile
phones.

From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Messaging).

Messenger
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a
simple group conversation. When you get a new conversation in
Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your phone.
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information, refer to
“Creating a New Google Account” on page 22.
2. From the Home screen, tap
– or –

(Apps) ➔

(Messenger).

From the Google+ application, select Messenger.

Music Player
This application allows you to play music files that you have stored
on your microSD card. You can also create playlists.

From the Home screen, tap
(Music Player).

268

(Apps) ➔

My Account Downloader
This application provides access to your current account information.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(My Account Downloader).
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the application.
3. Once installed, open the application and follow the on-screen
instructions.

My Files
This application allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in one
convenient location. This application allows you to launch a file if the
associated application is already on your phone (ex: MP4).

From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(My Files).

Note: Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with
folders, subfolders, etc.
Note: The application lets you view supported image files and text
files on both your internal storage and microSD card.

Applications and Development

269

Opening and Navigating within Files
DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the device.
These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(My Files).
2. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate your
selected file.
• Home tab
allows you to back up to the root directory.
• Up tab

allows you to back up into a higher directory.

• Press
and then tap View by to change the way the files are
displayed on-screen. Choose from: List, List and details, or
Thumbnail.
• Press
for these additional options: Select all, Create folder,
Search, View by, Sort by, and Settings.
• Place a checkmark alongside a desired folder then select Delete, Share,
or press the upper-right menu button to reveal these additional options:
Move, Copy, Rename, or Details.
3. Once you have located your file, tap the file name to launch the
associated application.

270

Navigation
Google Maps Navigation (Beta) is an internet-connected turn-by-turn,
GPS navigation system with voice guidance.
Caution! Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be wrong,
dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.
Important! To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in
the following conditions:
- inside a building or between buildings
- in a tunnel or underground passage
- in poor weather
- around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
- in a vehicle with tinted windows
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Navigation).

2. Read the on-screen disclaimer regarding the current release
status of the Navigation app and tap Accept.

Applications and Development

271

Enabling GPS Location
1. From the Home screen, press
Location services.

and then tap Settings ➔

Navigation options
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Navigation).
The navigation application can be configured from the main
screen.
2. If prompted, read the on-screen disclaimer and tap Accept.
3. Choose from the following on-screen options:
• Driving/Walking/Bicycling
: tap to configure the method of
travel. Selection of Walking would negate the need to track traffic jams
and obstructions.
• Speak destination: allows you to use the voice recognition feature to
search for matching locations in your area.
• Type destination: allows you to manually enter a destination address
(via the on-screen keypad).
• Go home: allows you to return to a designated “Home” location.

– When prompted initially to setup a home address, enter the location into
the Enter an address field and tap Save.
272

• Map: enables the on-screen real-time map functionality.

Navigation Map options
Once on the map screen, you can access the following features:
• Destination: returns you to the previous Navigation options screen.

• Search by voice: Speak your destination instead of typing.
• Layers: allows you to switch map views:
• Traffic view: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic
conditions are displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color
represents how fast the traffic is moving.
• Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth. Satellite
images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best imagery
available, most of which is approximately one to three years old.
• Parking: displays parking information relative to your current location.
• Gas stations: displays gas station location relative to your current
location.
• ATMs & banks: displays ATM and Bank locations relative to your current
location.
• Restaurants: displays restaurant and eatery locations relative to your
current location.

Applications and Development

273

While on the map screen, press

to access additional options:

• Set destination: returns you to the navigation options screen where you
can access a destination by either Speaking, Typing, or selecting from a
Contacts entry or Starred Place.

• Search: manually search for a destination address, place, name of
business, or even a type of business.

• Layers: allows you to switch map views. See previous description.
• Settings: provides access to both Power settings (Screen dimming) and
Information (Terms, privacy & notices).

• Exit navigation: terminates the application.
• Help: provides on-screen help.

Phone
This application provides the ability to make or answering calls,
access the Contacts list, which is used to store contact information.

From the Home screen, tap

(Phone).

For more information, refer to “Call Functions and Contacts List” on
page 79.

274

Play Books
Formerly known as Google Books, this application allows you to read
over 3 million ebooks on the go.
Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Play Books: jump right
into a bestseller or select from nearly 3 million free ebooks.
Personalize the reader to your liking, pick up reading where you left
off on your phone or computer, and settle down with a great book on
your Android phone!
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Play Books).
2. If prompted, tap Turn sync on. This synchronizes your books
you have previously selected between your Books account and
your device.
3. Tap

to begin searching for both free and paid ebooks.

4. Follow the on-screen prompts to download the ebook to your
device.

Applications and Development

275

Play Magazines
With Google Play Magazines, you can subscribe to your favorite
magazines and have them available to read on your device at any
time or any place.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Play
Magazines).
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so.
For more information, refer to “Signing into Your Google
Account” on page 23.
3. At the main screen, tap the upper-left Read Now link and then
select Shop to browse the full catalog.
4. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view Categories,
Featured, Top Selling, and New Arrivals.
5. Tap a magazine to see more information and subscribe.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe or purchase a
magazine.

276

Play Movies & TV
This application allows you to connect to the Play Store, download a
movie and then watch it instantly.
Learn more about Google Play Movies at:
http://play.google.com/about/movies.

From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Play Movies & TV). A list of videos sorted on the SD card
displays in the Video list.

From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

Applications and Development

(Play Music).

277

Play Store
Formerly known as the “Android Market”, this application provides
access to downloadable applications and games to install on your
phone. The Play Store also allows you to provide feedback and
comments about an application, or flag an application that might be
incompatible with your phone.
Before using the Play Store, you must have a Google Account.

Accessing the Play Store
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Play Store).

2. If not already logged in with your Google account, tap Next.
3. Tap Existing, enter your Google account information and tap
(Next).
4. Tap OK to agree to the Play Store terms of service.

Downloading a New Google Application
To download a new application, you will need to use your Google
account to sign in to the Play Store. The home page provides several
ways to find applications. The home page features applications and
includes a list of item applications by category, a list of games, a link
to search, and a link to My apps.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Play Store).
2. Browse through the categories, find an application you're
interested in, and tap the name.
3. Read the application descriptions.

278

Important! If the selected application requires access to data or
control of a function on your device, the Play Store displays
the information the application will access.
Tap OK if you agree to the conditions of the application.
Once you tap OK on this screen you are responsible for
using this application on the device and the amount of data
it uses. Use this feature with caution.
4. Tap Install ➔ ACCEPT.
Note: Use caution with applications which request access to any
personal data, functions, or significant amounts of data usage
times.
5. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to pay for the
application.
6. Check the progress of the current download by opening the
appears
Notifications panel. The content download icon
in the notification area of the status bar.
7. On the main Play Store screen, press
and then tap
My apps, tap an installed application in the list, and then tap
Open.
Tip: The newly downloaded applications display in the applications list
and are shown in alphabetical order if the View Type is set to
Alphabetical grid or Alphabetical list, or at the end of the list if
View type is set to Customizable grid.
Applications and Development

279

Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply.
Please contact your service provider for further details.

Launching an Installed Google Application
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Apps).

2. Tap the newly installed application. This application is typically
located on the last Applications page.

Unknown sources
This feature can be used for Android application development. The
feature allows developers to install non-Play Store applications.

From the Home screen, press
and then tap Settings ➔
Security ➔ Unknown sources.
Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it is
active.

Note: If Unknown sources is disabled, those applications without a
certificate will not be allowed to download to your device.

Manage applications
This feature allows you to manage and remove installed
applications. You can also view the amount of memory or resources
used as well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the
applications on your device and clear the data, cache, or defaults.

From the Home screen, press
Application manager.

280

and then tap Settings ➔

Clearing application cache and data
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap Settings ➔
Application manager.
2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.
3. Tap Force stop, Uninstall, Clear data, Clear cache, or Clear
defaults.
Uninstalling third-party applications
You can uninstall any application you downloaded and installed from
the Play Store.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap Settings ➔
Application manager ➔ ALL.
2. Tap the third-party application, and from the App info screen,
tap Uninstall.

Applications and Development

281

S Memo
The S Memo application allows you to create memos using the
keypad, your finger, or both. You can add images, voice recordings,
and text all in one place.

Creating a New Memo
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
The S Memo screen is displayed.

(S Memo).

2. Tap an existing Memo to open it then tap the screen to enter
edit mode.
– or –
to start a new memo in text mode with the keypad
Tap
displayed or tap
to start a new memo in drawing mode
using your finger or a compatible
on-screen writing tool. You can change back and forth in a
memo to add text with the keypad and the pen.
The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described in the
following table:
Saves the current memo and creates a new one.
Changes the view mode.
Allows you to add free-format drawing.
Displays the keypad to you can add text.
Eraser tool allows you to erase marks and drawings.

282

Undo the last action.
Redo the last action that was undone.
Make a voice recording to add to the memo.
Hide the secondary toolbar.
Show the secondary toolbar.
Add an additional page to the memo.
3. Press

to access the following options:

Note: Depending on whether you have saved the memo, are in keypad
mode, or in handwriting mode, the options will appear
differently. The following is a list of the options you may see.
• Rename: allows you to change the current memo title.
• Share via: allows you to share your memo using Group Play, Hangouts,
Picasa, Google+, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, Messaging, Gmail, or Email.
• Handwriting-to-text: allows you to transcribe handwriting into text.
• Export: allows you to save the memo to your Gallery as either a JPG or
as a PDF.
• Save as: allows you to save the memo with a different name.
• Add picture: allows you to add an image to the current memo. Choose
from: Picture, Take picture, Clip Art, Clipboard, or Map.
• Add tag: allows you to set tags to add in searches.
Applications and Development

283

• Add as favorite: allows you to tag the current memo as a favorite.
• Change background: allows you to set the background for your memo.
Swipe the screen to the left or right to select a background and then tap
Done.
• Link to Calendar: allows you to link the memo to your Calendar.
• Lock: allows you to lock an email by using a PIN number.
• Set as: allows you to set a memo as a contact icon, Home screen
wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper.
• Print: allows you to print the screen or web page on a Samsung printer
using Wi-Fi.
When you are finished creating your memo, tap Save on the top
menu bar.

S Voice

Launches your phone’s built-in voice recognition system that allows
you to initiate several common tasks without having to touch the
phone. Features include: Call, Text, Navigate, Play music, Memo, and
Driving mode.

From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(S Voice).

For more information, refer to “Using S Voice” on page 91.

284

Samsung Link
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung mobile
phone with your TV, streams content and even keeps tabs on who
calls or sends text messages with real-time, on-screen monitoring.
Samsung’s Samsung Link makes staying connected easy.
Allows users to share their in-device media content with other
external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living Network
Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also be DLNAcompliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital
multimedia streamer.
AllShare/Samsung Link Definitions:
Samsung Link/
This new feature builds on the
AllShare Play
previous AllShare Play functionality. It
includes features such as Web storage
integration and social networking
integration. This is a Web service
that requires using a Samsung account.
Group Play

A subset feature of Samsung Link, this
allows you to mirror photos and
multimedia presentations with other
members of your current Wi-Fi
group. Users must be on the same
Wi-Fi and provide an access code to
join the group.

Applications and Development

285

AllShare Cast
(with Hub
accessory)

This feature functions with an
external AllShareCast Hub to fully
mirror what is currently displayed on
your device to the external TV.

Important! You must first connect both of your communicating
devices to the same Wi-Fi and be using an
active/registered Samsung account prior to using this
application.
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi settings” on
page 321.
For more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung
Account” on page 25.
Important! The Samsung account manages the access information
(username/password) to several applications, such as
Samsung Link.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Samsung Link).

(Apps) ➔

2. If prompted, read the on-screen message about network
charges and tap OK to continue and return to the main screen.
3. If prompted, tap Sign in to log into your Samsung account.
Note: If the main screen still shows a Sign in box, close the application
and restart it.
286

4. Tap Start and follow the on-screen prompts.

Settings
This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your phone.
It includes such settings as: display, security, memory, and any extra
settings associated with your phone.

From the Home screen, tap
– or –
Press

➔

(Apps) ➔

(Settings).

and then tap Settings.

For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 321.

Video Player

The Video player application plays video files stored on your microSD
card.

From the Home screen, tap
(Video Player).

(Apps) ➔

Applications and Development

287

Voice Recorder
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one
minute long and then immediately send it as a message.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Voice Recorder).
2. Tap

(Record) to record an audio file.

3. Tap
(Stop) to stop recording. The file automatically saves
to the Voice list.
4. Tap

(Pause) to pause the recording of an audio file.

5. Tap

(Cancel) to cancel the recording of an audio file.

6. Tap

(List) to display a list of current receordings.

7. From the Recorded files page, press
and then select one
of the following:
• Share via and select a method in which to share this audio file.
Selections are: Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Group Play, Messaging, or
Wi-Fi Direct. Refer to each specific section, depending on the method
you selected to send this voice recording.
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings. Tap the
recordings to delete and tap Delete.
• Settings: the following settings are available:

– Storage: allows you to choose where your recordings will be saved.
Select between Phone or memory card.

– Recording quality: allows you to set the recording quality to High or
Normal.
288

– Limit for MMS: allows you to select On or Off. If you Limit for MMS by
selecting On, you will be assured that the recording can be sent in a
message.

– Contextual filename: allows you to assign a filename based on GPS tag
information.

– Default name: allows you to choose the name prefix for your recordings.
For example, if your Default name is Voice, your recordings would be
named Voice 001, Voice 002, Voice 003, etc.
• End: allows you to exit the application.

Voice Search
Launches the Google Now application that is used for voice to text
Internet searching.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Voice Search).
2. When prompted, speak into the built-in microphone.
3. Use the on-screen options to find a matching search term.

Applications and Development

289

VPN Client
This is a full-featured VPN Client that provides support for the latest
IPSec VPN standards and provides interoperability with support for
all major VPN Gateways.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(VPN Client).
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to configure the VPN Client.
• Options include: Add VPN Connection or My VPN Connections.

YouTube
YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and
share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(YouTube).
2. When the screen loads you can begin searching and viewing
posted videos.
To configure YouTube Settings:

Press
and then tap Settings and configure the following
parameters:
• General

– High quality on mobile, when enabled, allows you to start all videos in
high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile network.

– Caption font size allows you to set the font size used by on-screen
captions. Choose from: Small, Medium, Large, or Huge.

– Uploads specifies network preferences for uploads.
– Content localization allows you to prioritize channels and videos from
a specific country or region.

290

– Improve YouTube allows you to anonymously send YouTube
information to help improve the application.
• Connected TVs

– Allows you to piar your device to a wireless TV running a YouTube
application. Options include Add a TV and Edit TVs.
• Search

– Clear search history allows you to clear previous YouTube searches
from showing up in the YouTube search box.

– Never remember history allows you to force YouTube to never store
search history information.

– SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for videos
containing restricted content. This option blocks these videos from
appearing within your search results. Choose from: Don’t filter, Moderate,
or Strict blocking.
• Preloading

– Preload subscriptions allows you to preload (or go get videos while on
Wi-Fi and charging) your subscription videos.

– Preload watch later allows you to enable the preload function on
selected videos so you can watch them later. Read the data usage
information and tap OK to accept the terms.
Note: Preloading YouTube videos will use some of your device’s
storage space and may result in additional charges if your Wi-Fi
plan is not unlimited.

Applications and Development

291

• About

– Help provides answers to most YouTube questions.
– Feedback allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube.
– Google Mobile Terms of Service
– YouTube Terms of Service
– Google Mobile Privacy Policy
– YouTube Privacy Policy
– Open source licenses
– App version displays the software version for the current YouTube
application.
To watch a high quality video:

Press
mobile.

292

and then tap Settings ➔ General ➔ High quality on

Section 9: Connections
Your phone is equipped with features that allow you to quickly
connect to the web.

Internet

Your device is equipped with a Google browser to navigate the
mobile web. This section explains how to navigate the browser and
use the basic features.

Accessing the Internet
To access the Browser:

From the Home screen, tap

(Apps) ➔

(Internet).

Note: You must disable your Wi-Fi connection if you wish
to view the home page.

Navigating with the Browser
1. Tap an entry to select an item.
2. Sweep the screen with your finger in an up or down motion to
scroll through a website.
3. To return to a previous page, tap
4. To move forward to a web page, tap

.
.

Connections

293

Browser Options
1. From the top of the browser screen, select one of the available
options:
• Navigation: use the forward and back buttons to navigate through your
browsing activity.
• Refresh: reloads the current page.
• Bookmarks: provides access to the Bookmarks screen.
• Windows: displays a list of the windows you have open.
– or –
From the home page, press
options:

to access the following

• New window: launches a new browser window.
• Add bookmark: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list.
• Add shortcut to home screen: creates a shortcut to the web2go Home
page and then places it on an open area on an available extended
screen.
• Share page: allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a message.
• Find on page: allows you to search in the current page.
• Desktop view: allows you to assign the browser to display the current
page in the desktop view (to closely mimic the display as it would appear
on a Desktop computer).
• Save for offline reading: allows you to store the current page in
memory so that it can be read later even if you loose your Internet
connection.

294

• Brightness: allows you to assign a brightness level specifically for the
browser window. This is independent of the brightness assigned within
the device’s Settings menu.
• Downloads: displays the download history.
• Print: provides print access on compatible Samsung printers.
• Settings: allows you to change the way you view your web pages by
changing these options. For more information, refer to “Browser
Settings” on page 303.

Entering a URL
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL. Websites are
optimized for viewing on your phone.
To enter a URL and go to a particular website:

From the homepage tap the URL field at the top of the screen,
enter the URL and tap
.

Note: This is not the same application as the Google Search Widget.

Connections

295

Using Reader Mode
When activated, this feature restructures the current Web page to
provide a more reader-friendly experience. The text size can be
adjusted for easier reading.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Internet).
2. Navigate to a graphic heavy or content rich Web page.
3. If
(Reader Mode) appears in the Address bar, tap it to
activate the feature.
4. Adjust the Font size or tap
(Share via).
• Share via: allows you to share the website via Bluetooth, Email, Gmail,
Google, Google+, Hangouts, Messaging, S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.

Search the Internet
To perform an Internet search using keywords:
1. From within the Google search application, tap the Google
search field, enter the keyword(s) to search using the
on-screen keypad.
2. Tap

from the list of search results that are displayed.

3. Tap a link to view the website.

296

Adding and Deleting Windows
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time.
To add a new window:
1. From your browser window, tap
(New window).

(Window) ➔

2. A new browser window displays.
Note: The number of currently open windows is displayed at the
bottom of the WIndows screen.
3. Scroll across the screen to view the currently active windows
and tap an entry to launch the selected Internet window.
To delete an existing window:
1. From your browser window, tap

(Windows).

2. Scroll across the available windows and locate your target
window.
3. Tap

next to the listing to delete the window.

Going Incognito
The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites outside of the
normal browsing. Pages viewed in this incognito window won’t
appear within your browser history or search history, and no traces
(such as cookies) are left on your device.
Note: Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your
device after you exit the incognito mode.

Connections

297

To add a new incognito window:
1. From your browser window, tap
(Incognito).

(Windows) ➔

2. A new browser window displays.
Note: The incognito icon appears in the upper-left of the new browser
window while you are in this mode.
To exit from the incognito window:
1. From your browser window, tap

(Windows).

2. Scroll across the available windows and locate the incognito
window.
3. Tap

next to the incognito listing to delete this window.

Using Bookmarks
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to quickly and
easily access it at a future time. The URLs (website addresses) of the
bookmarked sites display in the Bookmarks page. From the
Bookmarks page you can also view your Most visited websites and
view your History.
1. From the webpage, tap
(Bookmarks).
The Bookmarks page displays. Additional pages include History
and Saved pages.
to display the following options:
2. Press
• List/Thumbnail view: Select Thumbnail view (default) to view a
thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or select List view to
view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed.
• Create folder: Creates a new folder in which to store new bookmarks.
298

• Change order: Rearranges the current bookmarks.
• Move to folder: Selected bookmarks are moved to a selected folder.
• Delete: Erases selected bookmarks.
3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and hold a
bookmark for the following options:
• Open: Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark.
• Open in new window: Opens the webpage in a new window.
• Edit bookmark: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the bookmark.
For more information, refer to “Editing Bookmarks” on page 300.
• Add shortcut to home screen: Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked
webpage to your phone’s Home screen.
• Share link: Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth, Email,
Gmail, Google+, Hangouts, Messaging, S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Copy link URL: Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a
message.
• Delete bookmark: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more
information, refer to “Deleting Bookmarks” on page 301.
• Set as homepage: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.

Connections

299

Adding Bookmarks
1. From the webpage, tap

➔ Add bookmark.

2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the name of the bookmark
and the URL.
3. Tap the Location field to assign a folder location.
Home is the default.
4. Select a storage location for your new bookmark.
5. Tap Save. The new save page now appears on the Bookmarks
page.

Editing Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark you
want to edit.
2. Tap Edit bookmark.
3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the name of the bookmark or
the URL.
4. Tap the Location field to assign a new folder location.
Home is the default.
5. Tap Save or Cancel to exit the operation.

300

Deleting Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark you
want to delete.
2. Tap Delete bookmark.
3. At the confirmation window, tap OK.

Emptying the Cookies
A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website during
navigation. In addition to containing some site-specific information, a
cookie can also contain some personal information (such as a
username and password) which might pose a security risk if not
properly managed. You can clear these cookies from your device at
any time.
1. From an active Web page, press
and then tap
Settings ➔ Privacy and security ➔Clear all cookie data.
2. Tap OK to delete the cookies or tap Cancel to exit.

Connections

301

Using Web History
The History list displays a list of the most recently viewed websites.
These entries can be used to return to previously unmarked web
pages.
1. From the webpage, tap
➔ History tab.
2. Select a visited range category. Choose from: Today, Yesterday,
or Most visited.
3. Tap an entry to display the webpage.
– or –
Press
and then tap Clear history to delete the current
History list.

Using Most Visited
The Most visited list provides you with a list of the most visited and
bookmarked websites. These entries are used to return to previously
unmarked web pages.
1. From the webpage, tap

➔ History ➔ Most visited tab.

A list of your most frequently visited webpages displays. The
most frequently visited web pages display at the top of the list.
2. Tap any entry to display the selected webpage.

302

Browser Settings
To configure browser settings:
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press

(Apps) ➔

(Internet).

and then tap Settings.

3. Choose an option from the following categories:
General:
• Set home page: Sets the current home page for the Web browser.
• Form auto-fill: Allows you to fill in Web forms with a single tap.
• Auto-fill text: Allows you to set the text used for the Web form auto-fill
feature.
Privacy and security:
• Clear cache: Deletes all currently cached data. Tap OK to complete the
process.
• Clear history: Clears the browser navigation history. Tap OK to complete
the process.
• Show security warnings: Notifies you if there is a security issue with
the current website. Remove the check mark to disable this function.
• Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and read
cookies from your device.
• Clear all cookie data: Deletes all current browser cookie files.
• Remember form data: Allows the device to store data from any
previously filled out forms. Remove the check mark to disable this
function.
• Clear form data: Deletes any stored data from previously filled out
forms. Tap OK to complete the process.
Connections

303

• Enable location: Allows websites to request access to your location.
• Clear location access: Clears location access for all websites. Tap OK
to complete the process.
• Remember passwords: Stores usernames and passwords for visited
sites. Remove the check mark to disable this function.
• Clear passwords: Deletes any previously stored usernames or
passwords. Tap OK to complete the process.
• Enable notifications: Enables notifications for all websites. Select
either: Always on, On demand (user driven), or Off.
• Clear notifications: Clears Web notification access for all websites.
Tap OK to complete the process.
Accessibility:
• Force zoom: Allows you to override a website’s zoom setting and forces
a zoom view.
• Text size: Allows you to manually adjust the size of the on-screen text
size (Scale text up and down), Zoom amount on double tap, and
minimum font size via the use of an on-screen slider.
• Inverted rendering: Allows you to adjust the way a Web page is
displayed to make it easier to view or read. Enabling this feature causes
a page to rendered in reverse - Black becomes white and vice versa.
On-screen white text is displayed as white text on a black background.
• Contrast: Allows you to adjust the on-screen contrast.
Note: The Contrast feature is disabled until the Inverted rendering
function is active.

304

Advanced:
• Select search engine: Allows you to choose a default search engine for
your phone. Choose from: Google Search, Yahoo!, or Bing.
• Open in background: New pages are launched in a separate page and
displayed behind the current one. Remove the check mark to disable
this function.
• Enable JavaScript: Enables javascript for the current Web page.
Without this feature, some pages may not display properly. Remove the
check mark to disable this function.
• Allow multiple tabs per app: Provides the ability for different
applications to launch separate tabs.
• Enable plug-ins: Allows the download of plug-ins such as Adobe Flash.
• Default storage: Sets the default storage to Memory card.
• Website settings: View advanced settings for individual websites.
• Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium, or Close.
• Open pages in overview: Displays an overview of recently viewed web
pages.
• Auto-fit pages: Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much of the
screen as possible.
• Block pop-ups: Prevents popup advertisement or windows from
appearing on-screen. Remove the check mark to disable this function.
• Text encoding: Adjusts the current text encoding.
• Reset to default: Clears all browser data and resets all settings to
default.

Connections

305

Bandwidth Management:
• Preload search results: Allows the browser to preload high confidence
search results in the background. If the device can accurately guess
your in progress search, it will preempt you by beginning to load the
matching Web page before you complete the search request.
• Page preloading: Allows the browser to preload pages in the
background.
• Load images: Allows web page images to load along with the other text
components of a loaded website.
Labs:
• Quick controls: allows you to enable on-screen quick controls via the
use of Swype thumb actions.
• Full screen: Allows Web pages to be resized to fit as much of the screen
as possible.

306

Bluetooth
About Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that allows
you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth devices, such as
headsets and hands-free car kits, and Bluetooth-enabled handhelds,
computers, printers, and wireless devices. The Bluetooth
communication range is usually up to approximately 30 feet.

Turning Bluetooth On and Off
To turn Bluetooth on:
1. From the Home screen, press

and then tap Settings.

2. In a single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the
right to turn it on.
The slider color indicates the activation status. When active,
displays in the Status area.
To turn Bluetooth off:
1. From the Home screen, press

and then tap Settings.

2. In a single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the
left to turn it off OFF
.

Bluetooth Status Indicators
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status
at a glance:
Displays when Bluetooth is active.
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and
communicating.
Connections

307

Bluetooth Settings
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the
characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service, including:
• Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth
communication and description

• Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other Bluetooth
devices

• Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:
1. From the main Settings page, tap Bluetooth.
2. Verify Bluetooth is active (indicated by

ON ).

3. Press
and tap the Rename device, Visible time-out, and
Received files fields to set the options.
To change your Bluetooth name:
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Rename device.
3. Enter a new name.
4. Tap OK to complete the rename process.
To set visibility:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the top of the Bluetooth settings page, toggle the state of
the visibility check mark. Activating this feature enabled your
device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate.

308

Note: Your device visibility is based on the time set within the Visible
time-out field (2 Minutes, 5 Minutes, 1 Hour, or Never timeout).
Press
(Menu) ➔ Visible time-out.
This value appears as a countdown within this Visible
time-out field.
To scan for Bluetooth devices:
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
2. From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan to
search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such
as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.
To review your Bluetooth received files:
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, press
Received files.

and then tap

Connections

309

Pairing Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted
connections between your device and another Bluetooth device.
When you pair devices, they share a passkey, allowing for fast,
secure connections while bypassing the discovery and
authentication process.
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time process.
Once pairing is established the devices continue to recognize
their partnership and exchange information without entering a
passcode.
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the Visibility checkbox
(shown by the device name).
Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an
external device. This is shown by a green check mark.
3. Tap Scan. Your device displays a list of discovered in-range
Bluetooth devices.
4. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.
5. If prompted, enter a passkey or PIN code, and tap OK.
6. The external device must accept the connection and enter your
device’s PIN code.
Once successfully paired to an external device,
in the Status area.
310

displays

Note: Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetoothcompatible devices, display and operations may be different,
and functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible
with all Bluetooth-compatible devices.
Important! If callers can not hear you during a call while using a
paired Bluetooth headset (with built-in microphone), verify
the Call audio option is enabled within the entry’s Bluetooth
Settings page.

Configuring Bluetooth Device Settings
Some connected Bluetooth devices are capable of more than just
functioning as a headphone, but also have built in microphones for
picking up voice. Although both functions are detected by the device
and activated, there might be times when you need to change or
update these settings for Phone and Media Audio:
• I can hear the other person but they can’t hear me...
• I want to use my Bluetooth device only as a headphone
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap

(Settings).

3. Toggle the Call audio field to activate/de-activate the Bluetooth
device’s on-board microphone.
4. Toggle the Media audio field to activate/de-activate the
Bluetooth device’s headset functions.

Connections

311

Note: If callers can not hear you during a call while using a paired
Bluetooth headset (with built-in microphone), verify the Call
audio option is enabled within the entry’s Bluetooth Settings
page.

Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between the
device and your phone, but retains the knowledge of the pairing. At a
later point when you wish to reconnect the device, there is no need
to setup the connection information again.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously paired
device (from the bottom of the page).
3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically
if the paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is
powered off.

Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection record” and
upon reconnection would require that you re-enter all the previous
pairing information.
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap
Unpair to delete the paired device.

312

(Settings) ➔

Sending Contacts via Bluetooth
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities, you
may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or other items
using a Bluetooth connection.
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be enabled on
both your phone and the external device, and the recipient’s
device must be visible.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is visible.
2. From the Home screen, tap

(Contacts).

3. Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the
on-screen context menu.
4. Tap Share namecard via ➔ Bluetooth and select a paired
external Bluetooth device.
Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and
communicating for the pairing to be successful.
5. A Bluetooth share notification displays in your notifications list.

Connections

313

Enable Downloading for Web Applications
Important! Before you can download a web application you must
insert an SD into the phone and enable the Unknown
sources feature (enables downloading). For more
information, refer to “Installing the microSD Memory Card”
on page 12.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Security ➔ Unknown sources
check box.
2. Tap OK to allow install of non-Play Store applications.
Tap again to remove the check mark and disable the
installation of non-Play Store applications.
Warning! Not all web applications are safe to download. In order to
protect your phone and data, use the Play Store to install
web applications. For more information, refer to
“Downloading a New Google Application” on page 278.

314

PC Connections
You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data cable
using various USB connection modes.
Media storage: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of both
the device and optional microSD to store and upload files. This
feature allows your computer to detect the device as a removable
storage drive.
Kies air: allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your
phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network.
Kies: allows you to manage music, movies and photos. You can also
backup precious contacts and calendars, download apps and
podcasts and automatically upgrade device firmware. Kies
conveniently syncs your life across all your devices.
Note: To sync your device to your computer it is highly recommended
that you install Samsung Kies which is available at
http://www.samsung.com/kies (for Windows/Mac).
Note: If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP
Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer. Also,
ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0 or Windows Media
Player 10 or higher installed on your computer.

Connections

315

Connecting as a Storage Device
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and access
the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the device, you can
also access the files directory from the memory card by using the
device as a memory card reader.
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable
disk, separate from the internal memory.
1. Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the cable to
the computer. After a few seconds, a pop-up window displays
on the PC when connected.
2. Open the folder to view files.
3. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.

Prior to using Kies air for Phone Update
Before using Kies air to upgrade your device, it is recommended that
you backup your personal data prior to use.
To export a Contact list to your microSD card:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
2. Press

and then tap Import/Export.

3. Tap Export to SD card ➔ OK.

316

Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Gallery).
2. Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos.
3. Remove the back cover and remove the internal microSD card
prior to initiating a Kies air update.

Enabling USB Debugging
USB debugging must be enabled before being able to use the
Development feature.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Developer options.
2. Tap the USB debugging field to verify the feature is active
before connecting your USB cable.
3. Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction jack
on your device to a PC.

Wi-Fi
About Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity") is a term used for certain types of
Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN). Wi-Fi communication requires
access to an existing and accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP).
These WAPs can either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot
Spots, or Secured (requiring knowledge of the Router name and
password).
Note: After you complete a connection to an active Wi-Fi network, the
Wi-Fi Calling feature will automatically be enabled.

Connections

317

Note: For additional information on WPS Connections, refer to "WPS
Push Button" on page 324 and "WPS PIN Entry" on page 325.

Activating Wi-Fi
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off (deactivated).
Activating Wi-Fi allows your device to discover and connect to
compatible in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points).
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap Settings.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider to the right to
turn it on. The slider color indicates the activation status. The
device scans for available in-range wireless networks and
displays them under Wi-Fi networks on the same screen.

Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the Home screen, press
Wi-Fi.

and then tap Settings ➔

The network names and security settings (Open network or
Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks display in the
Wi-Fi networks section.
2. Tap the network you wish to connect to.
Note: When you select an open network you are automatically
connected.
3. Enter a wireless password (if necessary).
4. Tap Connect.

318

Wi-Fi Status Indicators
The following icons indicate the Wi-Fi connection status:
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an available
open wireless network.
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and configured for a
direct connection to another compatible device in the
same direct communication mode.
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and
communicating.

Manually Add a New Network Connection
1. From the Wi-Fi network screen, tap Add Wi-Fi network.
2. Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless Access
Point).
3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This must
match the current security setting on your target WAP.
4. Enter your WAP’s password if the WAP is secure.
5. Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the target
WAP.
Note: No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the second
time to connect to a previously accessed or secured wireless
network. The WAP key is required when the device is reset
using factory default settings.
Connections

319

Deactivating Wi-Fi
1. From the Home screen, press

and then tap Settings.

2. In a single motion touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider to the left to
turn it off.
– or –
Activate and Deactivate Wi-Fi from the Notification bar.
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
can reduce battery life and use times.

Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the main Settings page, tap Wi-Fi.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider to the right to
turn it on.
3. Tap Scan.

Wi-Fi Advanced Settings
The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set up many of
the device’s Wi-Fi services, including:
• Setting the Wi-Fi sleep policy

• Check for Internet service
• Viewing the device’s MAC Address
• Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP
To access the Wi-Fi Advanced Settings menu:
1. From the main Settings page, tap Wi-Fi
2. Press
320

and then tap➔ Advanced.

Section 10: Changing Your Settings
This section explains the sound and phone settings for your device. It
includes such settings as: display, security, memory, and any extra
settings associated with your device.

Accessing Settings

From the Home screen, tap
– or –
Press
➔
screen displays.

(Apps) ➔

(Settings).

and then tap Settings. The Settings

Wi-Fi Settings
This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. For more information, refer
to “Wi-Fi” on page 317.

Activating Wi-Fi
1. From the Home screen, press

and then tap Settings.

2. In a single motion touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider to the right to
ON . The device scans for available in-range
turn it on
wireless networks and displays them under Wi-Fi networks on
the same screen.

Wi-Fi settings
Once set up for Wi-Fi connectivity, your device automatically uses
Wi-Fi, when available, for all your mobile services.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Wi-Fi.
2. Press
desired.

and then tap Advanced. Configure the settings as

Changing Your Settings

321

The available Wi-Fi connection are displayed with a security type
displayed next to them.

Network Notification
By default, when Wi-Fi is on, you receive notifications in the Status
bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi-Fi network. You can
deactivate this feature if you do not want to receive notifications.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Wi-Fi.
2. Press

and then tap Advanced.

3. Tap Network notification. A check mark displayed next to the
feature indicates Network notification is active.
4. Tap Network notification again to remove the check mark and
deactivate this feature.

Wi-Fi During Sleep
By default, when your device enter a sleep mode, your Wi-Fi
connection stays on all the time. If the feature is Never enabled
during sleep that current data usage is taken over by your SIM and
its network connection.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Wi-Fi.
2. Press
sleep.

and then tap Advanced ➔ Keep Wi-Fi on during

3. Select an available option:
• Always: maintains your current active Wi-Fi connection even during
sleep.
• Only when plugged in: maintains the active Wi-Fi connection only
when the device detects it is connected to a power supply. This reduced
the drain on your device’s battery.
322

• Never (increases data usage): shuts off the current Wi-Fi connection
during sleep and diverts any current data usage to the cellular network
connection.

Check for Internet Service
Allows you to check for Wi-Fi Internet access once connected to a
WAP (Wireless Access Point).
1. From the main Settings page, tap Wi-Fi.
2. Press

and then tap Advanced.

3. Tap the Check for Internet service field to activate the feature. A
green checkmark indicates the feature is active.

Finding your WI-Fi Address Information
1. From the main Settings page, tap Wi-Fi.
2. Press

and then tap Advanced.

3. Locate the MAC Address and IP Address information at the
bottom of the screen.
• MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required when
connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).
• IP address: view your device’s IP address.

Changing Your Settings

323

Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the main Settings page, tap Wi-Fi ➔ Add Wi-Fi network.
2. Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless Access
Point).
3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This must
match the current security setting on your target WAP
(Wireless Access Point).
4. Enter your WAP’s password if the WAP is secure.
5. Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the target
WAP.
Note: An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN. Its
purpose is to stop other wireless equipment from accessing
your LAN — whether accidentally or intentionally. To
communicate, wireless devices must be configured with the
same SSID.

WPS Push Button
The WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) feature (sometimes associated with
a physical or on-screen button on most WAPs) allows you to pair
your device and WAP without the need for entering a passcode. This
process is similar to Wi-Fi Direct pairing.
In this case, once the WPS feature is active on your WAP, your device
can then detect it and then immediately pair to it.
Note: WPS-capable routers appear in the Wi-Fi list of available
devices with the term (WPS available) below their name.
324

To pair your device using WPS:
1. Follow the WPS activation instructions specific to your Wireless
Access Point.
2. From the main Settings page, tap Wi-Fi.
3. Press

then tap WPS push button.

4. Once the connection is complete, confirm the external router
now appears in the Wi-Fi list as connected.

WPS PIN Entry
If a WPS Push Button does not work, there is an alternative WPS
connection method where you would use a device generated PIN
number to establish the connection. This number is then entered into
your WAP’s WPS client PIN field to complete the connection.
To pair your device using WPS PIN:
1. From the main Settings page, tap Wi-Fi.
2. Press

then tap WPS PIN entry.

3. Write down the generate PIN number and enter it into your
Wi-Fi Router’s client PIN field.
4. Once the connection is complete, confirm the external router
now appears in the Wi-Fi list as connected.

Changing Your Settings

325

Wi-Fi Direct Setup and Settings
You can configure your device to connect directly with other Wi-Fi
capable devices. This is an easy way to transfer data between
devices. These devices must be enabled for Wi-Fi direct
communication. This connection is direct and not via a HotSpot or
WAP.
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and configured for a
direct connection to another compatible device in the
same direct communication mode.
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and
communicating.
Note: Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi-Fi
network connection.
To activate your connection:
1. From the main Settings page, touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider
to the right to turn it on. The slider color indicates the
activation status.
2. Tap Wi-Fi Direct.
3. Tap Scan and select the single device name to begin the
connection process to another Wi-Fi Direct compatible device.
– or –
Tap Multi-connect ➔ Scan and select all the device names to
begin the connection process to these Wi-Fi Direct compatible
devices.

326

4. The target device is notified of the connection attempt via an
on-screen Invitation to connect popup. Tap Accept to complete
the connection.
Note: The target device must also have Wi-Fi Direct service active and
running before it can be detected by your device.
5. Tap Done. The direct connection is then established. Confirm
appears in the Status bar.

Bluetooth settings
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a device
name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices can discover
it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices with which to pair.
For more information, refer to “Bluetooth” on page 307.

Turning Bluetooth On and Off
To turn Bluetooth on:

From the main Settings page, in a single motion touch and
slide the Bluetooth slider to the right to turn it on.
The slider color indicates the activation status. When active,
displays in the Status area.

To turn Bluetooth off:

From the main Settings page, in a single motion touch and
slide the Bluetooth slider to the left to turn it off.

Note: Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use.

Changing Your Settings

327

Activating the Device Name
1. From the main Settings page, tap Bluetooth.
2. Verify Bluetooth is active (indicated by

ON ).

3. Press
and tap the Rename device. The assigned device
name displays.
4. Tap
to erase the current device name and enter a new
name for this device using the keyboard.
5. Tap OK to confirm your setting.

Activating Visibility
1. From the main Settings page, tap Bluetooth.
2. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
3. From the top of the Bluetooth settings page, toggle the state of
the visibility check mark. Activating this feature enabled your
device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate.

Scanning for Devices
This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you
can pair with them.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Bluetooth.
2. From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan to
search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such
as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.
Important! Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN
number to confirm and pair with them.

328

3. Enter a PIN to pair with the device, if one is required, and tap
OK.

Data Usage
Monitor and mange your device’s data usage capabilities.
Features include activation/deactivation or network data usage, set
mobile data usage for a set period of time, and view application data
usage.

From the main Settings page, tap Data usage.

To activate/deactivate Mobile data usage:
1. From the main Settings page, tap Data usage.
2. Tap the Mobile data field to activate the feature. A green
checkmark indicates the feature is active.
3. Tap the Mobile data field again to deactivate the feature.
To set a mobile data limit:
1. From the main Settings page, tap Data usage.
2. Place a check mark in the Set mobile data limit field.
3. Read the on-screen disclaimer info and tap OK.
4. Touch and drag the far right ends of the Red or Orange
horizontal lines to manually adjust both the Warning and
Maximum data limits.
5. Touch and drag the bottom grey vertical lines to adjust the time
frames.
6. Tap the Data usage cycle button and select either the current
cycle or define your own by selecting Change cycle.

Changing Your Settings

329

7. Press
and then select from the available on-screen
options:
• Restrict background data prevents background data usage. This can
help prevent over usage of your data minutes.
• Auto sync data allows the device to automatically sync information and
updates with your various services.
• Show Wi-Fi usage activates an additional Wi-Fi tab that shows you your
Wi-Fi data usage.

More Settings
This tab displays additional wireless and network information.

From the main Settings page, tap More settings.

Using Airplane mode
This mode allows you to use many of your device’s features, such as
Camera, Games, and more, when you are in an airplane or in any
other area where making or receiving calls or data is prohibited.
Important! When your device is in Airplane mode, it cannot send or
receive any calls or access online information or
applications.
1. From the main Settings page, tap More settings.
2. Tap Airplane mode. A check mark displayed next to the feature
indicates Airplane mode is active.
The Airplane mode icon
is displayed at the top of your
screen.

330

Mobile networks
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Mobile
networks options.

From the main Settings page, tap More settings ➔ Mobile
networks.

The following options display:
Use mobile data
Allows you to activate mobile data usage on your device.

From the main Settings page, tap More settings ➔ Mobile
networks ➔ Mobile data.

VPN settings
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual
Private Networks (VPNs).
Note: Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock PIN or
password. For more information, refer to “Security” on
page 371.

Changing Your Settings

331

Adding a VPN
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to
use: PPTP, L2TP/IPSec PSK, L2TP/IPSec RSA, IPSec Xauth PSK,
IPSec Xauth RSA, IPSec Hybrid RSA.
Important! Before you can use a VPN you must establish and
configure one.
1. From the main Settings page, tap More settings ➔ VPN.
2. If prompted, read the screen lock information and follow the
on-screen steps to setup an unlock PIN or password.
3. Tap Add VPN network.
4. In the form that appears, fill in the information provided by
your network administrator.
5. Tap Save.
Note: Similar setup process can be used for all available VPN types.

Connecting to a VPN
1. From the main Settings page, tap More settings ➔ VPN.
2. Tap the VPN entry you want to connect to.
3. Enter any requested credentials into the pop-up that opens.
4. Tap Connect.

332

Edit a VPN
1. From the main Settings page, tap More settings ➔ VPN.
2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to edit.
3. In the pop-up that opens, select Edit network.
4. Make the desired VPN setting changes.
5. Tap Save.

Delete a VPN
1. From the main Settings page, tap More settings ➔ VPN.
2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to delete.
3. Tap Delete network within the pop-up that opens up.

Near Field Communication
This feature is used to read and exchange tags. When used in
conjunction with Android Beam, your device can be used to beam
application content when NFC-capable devices are touched.
1. From the main Settings page, tap More settings.
2. Tap the NFC field and drag the activation slider to the on
position.
Note: Enabling NFC also enables Android Beam.
NFC can now be used to automatically connect to AllShare Cast.

Changing Your Settings

333

S Beam
This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam large files
directly to another compatible device that is in direct contact. These
files can be larger, such as Videos, HD pictures, and other large
files.You can beam images and videos from your gallery, music files
from your music player, and more.
1. From the main Settings page, tap More settings.
2. Verify the NFC feature is active.
3. Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on.
4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide the S
Beam slider to the right to turn it on.
5. Complete the transfer process between the two
NFC-enabled devices by placing them back to back.
This feature can come in very handy to quickly share pictures
between users with compatible S Beam devices.

334

Nearby devices
This option allows you to share your media files with nearby devices
using DLNA and connected to the same Wi-Fi.
1. From the main Settings page, tap More settings ➔ Nearby
devices.
2. Verify Wi-Fi Direct is enabled and you are paired with the
device you wish to detect and share content with.
3. In a single motion, place a checkmark in the File sharing field.
4. Verify

(Nearby devices) appears at the top of the screen.

5. At the Nearby devices prompt, tap OK.
6. Tap Shared contents, then check the media you would like to
share. Tap OK.
7. Tap Device name, then use the on-screen keyboard to change
the name shown to others. Tap Save.
8. Tap Allowed devices list, then select the connected devices you
would like to allow.
9. Tap Not-allowed devices list, then select the connected devices
you would like to not allow.
10. Tap Download to, then select the destination of any
downloaded (shared) content. Choose from Device (phone) or
SD card.
11. Tap Upload from other devices, then select the actions you’ll
take when you upload content from other devices. Choose
from either Always accept, Always ask, or Always reject.

Changing Your Settings

335

AllShare Cast
With AllShare Cast, you can wirelessly mirror what is currently
displayed on your device’s screen with an external TV via the
AllShare Cast Hub®.
1. From the main Settings page, tap More settings ➔ AllShare
Cast.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the AllShare Cast slider to
the right to turn it on. The slider color indicates the activation
status.
Note: This feature allows a connection between your device and the
optional AllShare Cast Hub, via a shared Wi-Fi Direct
connection. The AllShare Cast Hub then allows the
communicating TV to mirror what is being shown on the
device's display.

Kies via Wi-Fi
1. From the main Settings page, tap More settings.
2. Tap Kies via Wi-Fi ➔ OK.
3. Select a network connection and follow the on-screen
connection process.
Refer to the Kies Air process information for more information.

336

Call Settings
To access the Call settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press

(Phone).

and then tap Call settings.

Configuring General Call Settings
Configure the general call settings using this option.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press

(Phone).

and then tap Call settings.

3. Tap one of the following options:
• Call restriction: allows you to manage your rejection mode and rejection
list.

– Auto reject mode: sets the phone to automatically reject incoming calls
or messages.

– Auto reject list: provides access to current rejection entries and
numbers.
• Set reject messages: allows you to manage both existing rejection
messages and create new ones.
• Ringtones and keypad tones: allows you to manage your Device
ringtone, Device vibration, Incoming call vibration and Keytones settings.
• Call alert: allows you to assign call alert tones and activate call alerts
and vibration.

– Call vibrations: vibrates the phone when the called party answers.
– Call status tones: assigns sounds settings during the call. Choose from:
Call connect tone, Minute minder, and Call end tone.
Changing Your Settings

337

– Alerts on call: selects whether alarm and message notification is turned
off during a call.
• Call answering/ending: allows you to manage the settings for
answering and ending calls.

– Answering key allows you to press a key to answer the phone.
– Answer calls using voice allows you to answer an incoming call using
a voice command.

– The power key ends calls allows you to press the power key to end the
current call.
• Auto screen off during calls: allows you to force the screen to turn off
during an active call.
• Accessory settings for call: allows you to assign headset settings
during incoming calls.

– Automatic answering configures the device to automatically answer
and incoming call when a headset is detected.

– Automatic answering timer configures the time delay before the
device automatically accepts the incoming call.

– Outgoing call conditions configures the connected Bluetooth device to
make outbound calls within one of two settings: Even when device locked
or Only when device unlocked.
• My call sound: allows you to personalize the sounds you hear during a
call with and without earphones.

– Tap My call sound settings and select Personalize call sound.
– Follow the detailed on-screen instructions.

338

• Use extra vol. for calls: activating this feature places an extra volume
button on your currently active call screen.
• Increase volume in pocket: increases the ringtone volume when the
device is in a pocket or a bag. Uses the proximity sensor to detect its
location.
• Additional settings: allows you to configure additional call settings.
For more information, refer to “Configuring Additional Voice Call
Settings” on page 343.
• Voicemail service: allows you to assign the service.
• Voicemail settings: displays the settings for the voicemail.
• Ringtone: assigns your device’s ringtone.
• Vibrate: configures the vibrate settings. Choose from Always, Only in
silent mode, or Never.
• US dialing: replaces the “+” with a designated international dialing
prefix. For more information, refer to “US and International Dialing”
on page 344.

– Once US dialing is disabled, the International dialing field becomes
editable. Tap this filed and enter a new dialing prefix, then tap OK.
• TTY mode: allows you to configure the TTY settings. For more
information, refer to “TTY Mode” on page 345.
• DTMF tones: allows you to set the lengths of DTMF tones. For more
information, refer to “DTMF Tones” on page 345.
• Voice privacy: allows you to enable/disable an enhanced privacy mode.
The Voice Privacy option automatically reduces the sound of the
incoming caller’s voice for enhanced privacy. For more information, refer
to “Voice Privacy” on page 346.
Changing Your Settings

339

Call restriction
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Call restriction.
2. Activate the feature by moving the Auto reject mode slider to
the on position.
3. Tap Auto reject mode and tap one of the following options:
• All numbers: to reject all calls.
• Auto reject numbers: to reject all calls in your Reject list.
4. Tap Auto reject list.
5. Tap

to manually add numbers to the Reject list.

6. Tap Unavailable to create a checkmark and automatically reject
all calls that are not in your Contacts list.

Set reject messages
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Set reject messages.
2. Tap
– or –

to manually add a reject message.

Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed when you
want the call to be rejected. You can edit the message if
desired.
• Tap Save to save the reject message.

340

Ringtones and keypad tones
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Call settings ➔ Ringtones
and keypad tones.
2. Tap Device ringtone, select a ringtone, and tap OK.
3. Tap Device vibration, select a vibration type, and tap OK.
4. Tap Incoming call vibration to create a checkmark if you want
your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming.
5.

Tap Keytones to create a checkmark if you want tones to play
when the keypad is pressed.

Call alert
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Call alert.
2. Tap Call vibrations to enable your phone to vibrate when the
called party answers the phone.
3. Tap Call status tones to set the sound settings during a call
then tap OK.
4. Tap Alerts on call to turn off alarm and message notifications
during a call.

Call answering/ending
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Call settings ➔ Call
answering/ending.
2. Select any of the following options:
• Answering key: Tap this option to be able to accept incoming calls by
pressing the Home key.
• Answer calls using voice: Allows you to answer an incoming call using
a voice command.
Changing Your Settings

341

• The power key ends calls: This option will allow you to end a call by
pressing the power key without turning off the screen.

Auto screen off during calls
This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that your
phone will know to turn the screen off to save power.

From the main Call settings page, tap Auto screen off during
calls to create a checkmark and enable the feature.

Accessory settings for call
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Accessory settings for
call.
2. The following options are available:
• Automatic answering: configures the device to automatically answer
and incoming call when a headset is detected.
• Automatic answering timer: configures the time delay before the
device automatically accepts the incoming call.
• Outgoing call conditions: allows you to make calls even when the
device is locked.

My call sound
This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear during a
call with and without earphones.
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Call settings ➔ My call
sound.
2. Tap My call sound settings.
3. Tap Personalize call sound and follow the detailed
on-screen instructions.
342

Use extra vol. for calls
This option allows you to see an extra volume button on the screen
during calls.

From the main Call settings page, tap Use extra vol. for calls to
create a checkmark and enable the feature.

Increase volume in pocket
This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is in a
pocket or a bag. It uses the proximity sensor to detect its location.

From the main Call settings page, tap Increase volume in
pocket to create a checkmark and enable the feature.

Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Additional settings.
2. Tap one of the following options:
• Noise reduction: suppresses background noise on your side of the
conversation during an active call.

Voicemail
You can view your voicemail number from this menu.
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Voicemail service.
2. Tap My carrier.
3. If an additional voicemail service is in use (other than carrier/
service provider), tap Voicemail settings to now view your
selected voicemail number and information.

Changing Your Settings

343

Device Ringtone
This option allows you to assign a default ringtone when an incoming
voicemail message is received.
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Ringtone.
2. Select a ringtone and tap OK.

Vibrate
This option allows you to activate a vibration when an incoming
voicemail message is received.
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Vibrate.
2. Select an available option. Choose from: Always, Only in Silent
mode, or Never.

US and International Dialing
Similar to prefix dialing, these two menus allow you to use either a
default “011” entry when using the “+” dialing shortcut, or replace it
with a new user-defined set of digits.
To dial a U.S. long distance code:
1. From the Home screen, tap

(Phone).

2. Touch and hold
to display “+” on-screen. This shortcut
uses the International dialing prefix entered into the
International dialing menu. The default is “011”.
To change the International dialing prefix:
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Call settings
2. Remove the check from the US dialing field and then tap the
International dialing field.

344

3. Use the on-screen keypad to delete the current entry and
replace it with a new one. Tap OK once complete.

TTY Mode
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf, hard of
hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to
communicate by telephone.
Your device is compatible with select TTY devices. Please check with
the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is compatible
with digital cell phones.
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that plugs
into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was not provided with
your TTY device, contact your TTY device manufacturer to purchase
the connector cable.
1. From the main Call settings page, tap TTY mode.
2. Tap TTY Off, TTY Full, TTY HCO, or TTY VCO to activate the
feature, or TTY Off to deactivate the feature. Off is the default
setting.

DTMF Tones
DTMF tones are the sounds you hear when pressing each number a
touch-tone phone. The DTMF tones feature allows you to set the
length of time that you hear each tone when tapping a number on
the phone’s dialpad.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press

(Phone).

and then tap Call settings ➔ DTMF tones.

3. Choose from either Normal or Long.
Changing Your Settings

345

Voice Privacy
The Voice Privacy option automatically reduces the sound of the
incoming caller’s voice for enhanced privacy.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone).
2. Press

and then tap Call settings.

3. Tap the Voice privacy field to activate the feature
(a green checkmark appears in the adjacent field).

Home Screen Mode
This application allows you to set your display to the conventional
layout of Standard mode or provide an easier user experience for the
first-time smartphone users using Starter mode.
1. From the main Settings page, tap
(Home screen mode).
2. Tap the pull-down dropbox and select one of the following
options:
• Standard mode: provides conventional layout for the apps and widgets
on your home screens.
• Starter mode: provides easier user experience for first-time smartphone
users on the home screens.
3. Tap Apply and give your device a few seconds to update the
device with the new look and feel.

346

Sound Settings
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as well as
configure the display settings.

From the main Settings page, tap Sound.

The following options display:

Silent mode via Device Options Screen
Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from
making noise, in a theater for example. In Silent Mode the speaker is
muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of incoming calls, or
other functions that normally have a defined tone or sound as an
alert.
1. From the Home screen, press and hold
(Power/End)
until Device options displays.
2. Tap Mute from the Device Options screen to activate or
deactivate this mode (the current mode displays).
Note: Additional options include Vibrate and Sound.

Changing Your Settings

347

Adjusting the Volume Settings
The Volume menu now provides access to various volume settings
within one on-screen popup menu.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Sound ➔ Volume.
2. Touch and drag the on-screen slider to assign the volume
settings for any of the following volume levels.
• Music, video, games, and other media, Ringtone, Notifications or
System.
3. Tap OK to assign the volume levels.

Vibration intensity
Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the vibration is
for different options.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Sound ➔ Vibration intensity.
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration intensity for
Incoming call, Notification, and Haptic feedback.
3. Tap OK to assign the vibration levels.

Setup the Voice Call Ringtone
This option allows you to set the ringtone.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Sound.
2. Tap Device ringtone.
3. Tap a ringtone from the available list. The ringtone briefly plays
when selected.
4. Tap Add to locate a compatible media file that can be used as a
ringtone.
5. Tap OK to assign a ringer.
348

Setup the Device Vibration
This option allows you to set your device to vibrate and ring.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Sound.
2. Tap Device vibration.
3. Select a vibration pattern and tap OK.
– or –
Tap Create to then use an on-screen touch circle to create your
own custom vibration pattern. Tap Save to store the new
vibration pattern.

Setting a Default Notification Ringtone
This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for
notifications and alarms.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Sound ➔ Default
notifications.
2. Tap one of the ringtones and tap OK.

Setting up Sound and Vibration
This option allows you to adjust the sound and vibration functions.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Sound.
2. Tap the Vibrate when ringing field to activate the feature.

Changing Your Settings

349

Audible System Tone Settings
These options are used when you use the dialing pad, make a
screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the screen. Each time you
press a key or make a selection the selected tone sounds.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Sound.
2. Tap Keytones to activate a tone when you use on-screen keys.
A check mark displayed next to these features indicates active
status.
3. Tap Touch sounds to activate a tone when you touch the
screen. A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates
active status.
4. Tap Screen lock sound to activate a tone when you use the
Lock screen. A check mark displayed next to this feature
indicates active status.
5. Tap Haptic feedback to activate the a vibration when you press
soft keys on certain screens. A check mark displayed next to
the feature indicates this feature is active.
6. Tap Auto haptic to enable the ability of the device to vibrate
automatically in response to sounds of downloadable apps.
7. Tap Emergency tone to set the notification for emergency
events to either: Off, Alert, or Vibrate.

350

Display Settings
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display such as
the font, orientation, pop-up notifications, puzzle lock feature,
animation, brightness, screen timeout, and power saving mode.

Adjusting the Screen Display
1. From the main Settings page, tap Display.
2. Configure the following screen display settings:
• Wallpaper: allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home screen, Lock
screen, or both.
• LED indicator: allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging, low
battery, incoming notifications, and voice recording. The light will turn on
by default unless you turn them off.
• Multi window: tap this option to enable/disable the automatic
Multi window feature.
Note: For more information on the Multi window feature, refer to
"Using the Multi Window" on page 61.
• Page buddy: allows context related pages to be created on the Home
screen. You can select Earphones page, Docking page, and Roaming
page. Tap Page buddy help for more information.
• Brightness: adjusts the on-screen brightness level. For more
information, refer to “Adjusting Screen Brightness” on page 353.
• Auto-rotate screen: when enabled, the phone automatically switches
from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa. When this setting is
disabled, the phone displays in portrait mode only.
Changing Your Settings

351

• Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen automatically
turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes,
5 minutes, and 10 minutes.
• Smart rotation: disables the auto screen rotation by checking the
orientation of your face and the device.
• Smart stay: tap this option to disable the screen timeout if your device
detects that your face is watching the screen.
• Font style: sets the fonts used on the LCD display. Selections are:
Default font, Choco cooky, Helvetica S, Rosemary, or Get fonts
online. Tap Get fonts online to download additional fonts.
• Font size: allows you to select which size of font is displayed.
• Touch key light duration: to adjust the light duration of the touch keys.
• Display battery percentage: to activate/deactivate the display of
battery charge percentage atop the battery icon at the top of the screen.
• Auto adjust screen tone: adjusts the phone’s LCD brightness level to
automatically adjust and conserve battery power.

352

Adjusting Screen Brightness
This feature configures the LCD Brightness levels.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Display ➔ Brightness.
2. Tap Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust and
tap OK.
– or –
Touch and slide the on-screen slider to adjust the level and tap
OK.

Assigning a Wallpaper
The Wallpaper settings option allows you to set the Wallpaper for
your Home screen, Lock screen, or both.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Display ➔ Wallpaper.
2. Select an available option to change its current wallpaper.
For more information, refer to “Managing Wallpapers” on page 77.

LED Indicator
This option allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging,
missed events, and incoming notifications. The light will turn on by
default unless you turn them off.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Display ➔ LED indicator.
2. Tap the following LED indicator options to turn them on or off:
• Charging: LED lights up when the device is connected to the charger.
• Low battery: LED lights up when the battery level is low.
• Notifications: LED lights up when you have missed calls, messages, or
application events.

Changing Your Settings

353

• Voice recording: LED lights up when you are recording voice. The LED
only lights up when the screen is off.

SD Card & Device Storage
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the memory
card as well as mount or unmount the SD card.
• microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 4GB.

• microSDHC™ memory card types can range from 4GB to up to 32GB.
• microSDXC™ memory card types can include capacities greater than
32GB.
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:

From the main Settings page, tap Storage.
The available memory displays under the Total space and SD
card headings.

Important! DO NOT remove a microSD card while the device is
accessing or transferring files. Doing so will result in loss
or damage of data. Make sure your battery is fully charged
before using the microSD card. Your data may become
damaged or lost if the battery runs out while you are using
the microSD card.

354

Mounting the SD Card
To store photos, music, videos, and other applications. You must
mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the SD card
establishes a USB connection with your computer.
Important! You must enable USB storage to mount the SD card.
1. From the Home screen, press
Storage.

and then tap Settings ➔

2. Tap Mount SD card.

Unmounting the SD card
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the SD
card while removing it from the slot.
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap Settings ➔
Storage.
2. Tap Unmount SD card ➔ OK.
3. After the “SD card will be unmounted” message displays and
the Mount SD card now appears in the menu list, remove the
SD card. For more information, refer to “Removing the
microSD Memory Card” on page 13.

Changing Your Settings

355

Erasing Files from the SD card
To erase files from the SD card using the device:
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information, refer to
“Unmounting the SD card” on page 355.
2. From the Home screen, press
Storage ➔ Mount SD card.

and then tap Settings ➔

3. Tap Format SD card ➔ Format SD card ➔ Delete all to format
the SD card. The SD card formats and erases all the data
stored on it.

Power Saving Mode
This feature allows you both automatically set the phone to use a
power saving mode and configure additional power saving options
manually, all in an effort to conserve battery power.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Power saving mode.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the slider to the right to turn
it on.
3. Tap the following options to create a check mark and conserve
power:
• CPU power saving: allows you to limit the maximum performance of the
CPU.
• Screen power saving: allows you to lower the screen power level.
• Background color: allows you to change the background color on email
and internet to save power.
• Turn off haptic feedback: allows you to turn off vibration when you tap
or touch the screen.
356

4. Tap Learn about power saving to learn about various ways to
conserve battery power.
5. When the power gets low, confirm
appears at the top of
the screen. This indicates the power saving mode is active.

Battery Usage
This option allows you to view a list of those components using
battery power. The amount of time the battery was used also
displays. Battery usage displays in percentages per application.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Battery. The battery level
displays in percentage.
2. From the upper-right tap
– or –

(Refresh) to update the list.

Tap an entry to view more detailed information.
Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery use.

Changing Your Settings

357

Application Manager
This device can be used for Android development. You can write
applications in the SDK and install them on this device, then run the
applications using the hardware, system, and network. This feature
allows you to configure the device for development.
Warning! Because the device can be configured with system software
not provided by or supported by Google or any other
company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.
This menu allows you to manage installed applications. You can view
and control currently running services, or use the device for
application development.
You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well
as the remaining memory and resources for each of the applications
on your phone and clear the data, cache, or defaults.

From the main Settings page, tap Application manager ➔ ALL.

Clearing Application Cache and Data
Important! You must have downloaded applications installed to use
this feature.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Application manager.
2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.
3. Tap Force stop, Uninstall, Disable, Clear data, Clear cache, or
Clear defaults.

358

Uninstalling Third-party Applications
Important! You must have downloaded applications installed to use
this feature.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Application manager.
2. Tap the DOWNLOADED tab and select your desired application.
3. Tap Uninstall (from within the top area of the Application info
page).
4. At the prompt, tap OK to uninstall the application.
5. Select a reason for uninstalling the application, then tap OK.

Running Services
The Running services option allows you to view and control currently
running services such as Backup, Hangouts, SNS (messaging),
Swype, and more.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Application manager.
2. Tap the RUNNING tab to view all currently active and running
applications. This tab also shows the total RAM being used by
these currently active applications.
3. Tap a process and select Stop to end the process and stop it
from running. When you stop the process the service or
application will no longer run until you start the process or
application again.
4. Tap Show cached processes to view additional cached
applications.

Changing Your Settings

359

Important! Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences
on the application.

Storage Used
This option allows you to view a list (on the current tab) of current
applications as sorted by size.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Application manager.
2. Tap the ALL tab to display all available applications.
3. Press
and then tap Sort by size to change the current list
to show items based on the amount of storage they occupy.

Location Services
The Location services allows you to configure the device’s location
services.
Important! The more location determining functions are enabled, the
more accurate the determination will be of your position.

Using Wireless Networks
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Use
wireless networks option.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Location services.
2. Tap Use wireless networks allows apps to use data from
sources such as Wi-Fi and mobile networks to provide a better
approximation of your current location.

360

Enabling the GPS Satellites
1. From the main Settings page, tap Location services.
2. Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.

Enabling the Location and Google Search
1. From the main Settings page, tap Location services.
2. Tap Location and Google search to enable the GPS satellite.
Tip: When using Google Maps you can turn on Location and Google
search. Enabling this feature allows you to locate places of
interest at the street-level. However, this also requires a clear
view of the sky and uses more battery power.

Lock Screen
This menu contains features that allows you to configure the
device’s security parameters.

Screen Unlock Pattern Overview
To secure data and limit phone access, set the phone to require a
screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device, or every
time the phone wakes up from sleep mode (when the screen
automatically turns off).
The Screen lock menu allows to choose from a variety of locking
features such as: Swipe, Motion, Face unlock, Face and voice, Pattern,
PIN, Password, or None.

Changing Your Settings

361

Using Swipe
This feature is the least secure locking method and only requires
that a user swipe the screen to unlock the device.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Lock screen.
2. Tap Screen lock ➔ Swipe.

Using a Motion to Unlock
This feature allows you to lock or unlock your device by simply tilting
it and moving it either forwards or backwards.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Lock screen.
2. Tap Screen lock ➔ Motion ➔ OK.
To unlock a device with motion:
1. Verify the device is on and on the Lock screen.
2. In a single motion, use your thumb to touch and hold the Lock
screen, then quickly tilt the device towards you.
Note: If you forget, these instructions appear at the bottom of the Lock
screen.

362

Using Face Unlock
This feature used facial recognition to unlock your phone. This
feature is less secure than PIN, Pattern, and Password locks and can
be bypassed by someone else who looks similar to you.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Lock screen.
2. Tap Screen lock ➔ Face unlock.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap Set it up.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Using Face and Voice Unlock
This feature used facial recognition to unlock your phone. This
feature is less secure than PIN, Pattern, and Password locks and can
be bypassed by someone else who looks similar to you.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Lock screen.
2. Tap Screen lock ➔ Face and voice.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap Set it up.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Once prompted to speak and unlock command, tap
and repeat the phrase four times.
6. Once complete, tap Done.

Changing Your Settings

363

Setting an Unlock Pattern
Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the phone.
When you enable the User visible pattern field, you will draw an
unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to unlock the
phone’s buttons or touch screen. When you activate the User tactile
feedback field, you feel vibration as feedback while drawing the
pattern.
The feature is now paired with a backup PIN code that acts as a
backup to the pattern lock. If you forget your pattern, you can regain
access to the device by entering a PIN code.
Note: Make sure the Require Pattern field is activated.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Lock screen.
2. Tap Screen lock ➔ Pattern.
3. Read the instructions then tap Next.
4. Review the on-screen animation procedure for drawing a
pattern and tap Next when you are ready to draw a pattern.
5. Draw your pattern by touching your first on-screen point. Then,
without removing your finger from the screen, drag your finger
over adjacent points until the gray trace line overlaps each point
and they are highlighted with a green circle.
6. When you have connected at least four dots in a vertical,
horizontal or diagonal direction, lift your finger from the screen
and tap Continue.
7. Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping
Confirm. The Unlock pattern is set.
364

8. Enter the backup PIN code and tap Continue.
9. Reenter the PIN to reconfirm the previous entry and
tap OK.

Changing the Screen Lock Pattern
This feature allows you to change the previously stored unlock
pattern and update it if necessary. This process is similar to
changing your password from time to time.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Lock screen.
2. Tap Screen lock.
3. Retrace your current pattern on the screen.
4. Tap Pattern and repeat steps 3 - 7 from the previous section.

Deleting the Screen Lock Pattern
1. From the main Settings page, tap Lock screen.
2. Tap Screen lock.
3. Retrace your current pattern on the screen.
4. Tap None.

Changing Your Settings

365

What If I Forget my Pattern?
If you forget your device's lock pattern, you can unlock your device
or reset it using your Google™ Account credentials. When you enter
the wrong unlock pattern too many times, you should see an option
at the bottom of the screen that says Forgot pattern? Follow these
steps to use either your PIN or email address.
Important! You can only enter an incorrect lock pattern 5 times before
the device is locked.
Important! If you are unsuccessful in retrieving your lock pattern or
unlocking your device, please contact T-Mobile for
assistance.
To unlock your device with a PIN code:
1. Tap Forgot pattern? (located at the bottom of the screen).
2. Scroll down and tap the Type PIN code field and use the onscreen keypad to enter the backup PIN code you setup when
you created your lock pattern.
3. Tap OK.
4. If you have forgotten your current pattern, tap Pattern from the
Screen unlock settings menu and follow the procedures
outlined in "Setting an Unlock Pattern" on page 364 to create
a new pattern.

366

To unlock your device using your Google account:
1. Tap Forgot pattern? (located at the bottom of the screen).
2. Tap the Username (email) and Password fields, use the
on-screen keyboard to enter your Google Account credentials,
and tap Sign in to complete the login process.
3. If you have forgotten your Google Account credentials, visit the
Google website to recover them. If you still cannot get your
Google Account credentials, contact your service provider for
additional options.

PIN Lock and Unlock
1. From the main Settings page, tap Lock screen.
2. Tap Screen lock ➔ PIN.
3. Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch
Continue to confirm the password.
4. Confirm the PIN by re-entering it and tap OK to confirm.
Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in order
to unlock the phone.

Password Lock and Unlock
1. From the main Settings page, tap Lock screen.
2. Tap Screen lock.
3. Tap Password.
4. Enter a password using the keypad and tap Continue to
confirm the password.
5. Confirm the password by re-entering it and tap OK to confirm.

Changing Your Settings

367

Samsung Unlock Options
Activate or deactivates various Unlock screen functions.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Lock screen ➔ Lock screen
options.
2. Tap Lock screen options and choose from:
• Shortcuts sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock screen.
• Information ticker sets the news and stock information ticker to appear
across the bottom of the Lock screen.
• Clock allows you to display the digital clock while the Lock screen is
active. Enabled by default.
• Dual clock displays a set of dual digital clock on the Lock screen while
you are traveling. Tap the entry to set your home city. This time zone
then becomes the time used by one of these on-screen clocks.
• Weather displays the current area weather on the Lock screen.
Tap and set both the temperature units (F or C) and a refresh time.
• Ripple effect activates/deactivates the ripple effect on the lock screen
when you tap it.
• Help text shows help information on the Lock screen.
• Camera quick access provides you with quick access to the camera
function from the Lock screen. When active, in a single motion.
• Wake up in lock screen requires that you say a command to wake-up
S Voice.
• Set wake-up command designates your S Voice wake-up commands.
Tap Wake-up S Voice and follow the on-screen prompts to create a new
verbal command.
368

Note: These options vary depending on the selected Lock settings.
Customizing Your Lock Screen Shortcuts
Your device also provides up to 4 application shortcuts that can be
used to quickly access an application right from the lock screen.
Important! To use these shortcuts, your Screen Lock feature can only
be set to either Swipe or None.
To open a shortcut from the lock screen:

In a single motion, swipe your finger over the on-screen icon
and towards the top of your device. Your device will unlock and
you will be taken immediately to the application.

To edit these Lock screen shortcuts:
1. From the main Settings page, tap Lock screen ➔ Lock screen
options.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Shortcuts slider to the
right to turn it on.
3. Tap the Shortcuts field to activate the menu.
4. Tap a shortcut icon you wish to replace.
5. From the select application menu, tap a replacement
application.
6. Press

to return to the previous screen.

Changing Your Settings

369

Using a Visible Pattern
When the Make pattern visible option is enabled, the device displays
the on-screen lock grid that is used for unlocking.
Note: This option only appears when a screen lock option is active.

Locking Automatically
This option allows you to define the amount of time that must pass
before the device can automatically lock on its own.
Note: This option only appears when a screen lock option is active.

Lock Instantly with Power Key
When enabled, the screen is automatically locked after pressing the
Power/Lock key.
Note: This option only appears when a screen lock option is active.

Vibrate on Screen Tap
When enabled, you will feel vibration as feedback while drawing the
pattern, using a PIN or password lock.
Note: This option only appears when a screen lock option is active.

370

Owner Information
This option allows you to show user-defined information on the Lock
screen.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Lock screen ➔ Owner
information.
2. Tap the Show owner info on lock screen checkbox to create a
checkmark if you want your owner information displayed.
3. Enter text that you would like displayed on your Lock screen.
4. Tap OK to save the new text and return to the previous screen.

Security
The Security settings allow you to determine the security level for
your device.

Encrypt Device
When enabled, this feature requires a numeric PIN or password to
decrypt your phone each time you power it on or encrypt the data on
your SD card each time it is connected:
1. From the main Settings page, tap Security.
2. Tap Encrypt device. For more information, read the displayed
help screen.
3. Tap Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption on SD
card data that requires a password be entered each time the
microSD card is connected.
Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.
Encryption may take an hour or more.

Changing Your Settings

371

Password Settings
When you create a phone password you can also configure the
phone to display the password as you type it instead of using an
asterisk (*).
1. From the main Settings page, tap Security.
2. Tap Make passwords visible to activate this feature.

Device Administration
Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone in a
way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC. This would be
beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or stolen. The phone
could be “deactivated” or “restricted” (through administration) from
a remote location.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Security.
2. Tap Device administrators to begin configuring this setting.
3. Select an administrator device and follow the prompts.

Unknown Sources
Before you can download a web application you must enable the
Unknown sources feature (enables downloading). Developers can
use this option to install non-Play Store applications.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Security.
2. Tap Unknown sources to active this feature.
Note: If you are notified that you can not download a Play Store
application because it comes from an “Unknown source”,
enabling this option corrects this issue.

372

Credential Storage
This option allows certain applications to access secure certificates
and other credentials. Certificates and credentials can be installed to
the SD card and password protected.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Security.
2. Tap Trusted credentials to display only trusted CA certificates. A
check mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure
credentials.
3. Tap Install from device storage to install encrypted certificates
from the USB Storage location.
4. Tap Clear credentials to clear the device (SD card or phone
memory) of all certificate contents and reset the credentials
password.

Language and Input Settings
This setting allows you to configure the language in which to display
the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard options.

From the main Settings page, tap Language and input.

Language Settings
To set the language that the menus display on the phone:
1. From the main Settings page, tap Language and input ➔
Language.
2. Select a language and region from the list.

Changing Your Settings

373

Choose Input Method
1. From the main Settings page, tap Language and input ➔
Default.
2. Select an input method.
– or –
From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion,
touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the
screen to open the Notifications screen. Tap
(Choose
input method) and select an available input method.

Swype Settings
To configure Swype settings:
1. From the main Settings page, tap Language and input ➔
(adjacent to the Swype field).
2. Tap Settings to alter these parameters:
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you enter text
using the keypad.
• Sound on keypress: turns on sounds generated by the Swype
application.
• Pop-up on keypress: turns on the display of characters above keys
when typing.
• Show complete trace: once enabled, sets wether or not to display the
complete Swype path.
• Auto-correction: automatically corrects typing mistakes.
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a
sentence.
374

• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words. When you
finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the next word.
• Next word prediction: once enabled, predicts the next word in your text
string based on your current text entries.
• Show Voice key: once enabled, shows an Voice to text key within the
on-screen keyboard.
3. Tap My Words to configure various Dictionary and Data
Management features.
• Backup & Sync: when active, allows you to backup your Swype
dictionary and sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices.
• Living Language: allows you to automatically update Swype with
popular new words. Tap Accept to continue the process.
• Social integration: allows you to log into the available social media
accounts to add help personalize your personal dictionary with
commonly used words or names from your available accounts. Choose
from the following social media types:

– Facebook: allows you to log into your current Facebook account from
where contact names are added to your Swype’s personal dictionary for
later use when you enter names into text fields. Helps recognize familiar
names.

– Twitter: allows you to sign into your existing Twitter account from where
names and words are added to your personal dictionary. Helps recognize
familiar names and words.

– Gmail: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account from where
existing contact information is added to your personal dictionary. Helps
recognize familiar names.
Changing Your Settings

375

• Edit my dictionary: allows you to edit your current personal Swype
dictionary.
• Clear language data: allows you to delete all personal language data,
including your defined words.
• Contribute usage data: when enabled, allows the Nuance® application
to collect usage data for better word predictions.
• Cellular data: when enabled, activates cellular data usage by the Swype
application so it can receive program updates, language downloads, and
other related features via your existing data connection.
4. Tap Languages to activate and select the current text input
language. Default language is US English.
• Download languages: allows you to download additional languages.
• The Active field displays the current language.
5. Tap Gestures to view an on-screen reference page related to
Gesture usage.
6. Tap Help to review help information for the Swype functionality
and view information about the version.
7. Tap Updates to update the application if new software is
available.

376

Samsung Keyboard Settings
1. From the main Settings page, tap Language and input ➔
(adjacent to the Samsung keyboard field).
– or –
From within an active text entry screen, touch and hold
(Input Methods), drag across the icons, and select
(Settings) to reveal the Samsung keyboard settings screen.
2. Set any of the following options:
• Portrait keyboard types allows you to choose a keyboard configuration
(Qwerty keyboard [default] or 3x4 keyboard).
• Input languages sets the input language. Tap a language from the
available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected language.
• Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode. This must be
enabled to gain access to the advanced settings. Touch and hold to
access the advanced settings.
• T9 Trace like using Swipe, allows you to enter text by sliding your fingers
across the on-screen keyboard. This feature is optimized for use with the
on-screen QWERTY keyboard.
• Handwriting allows you to configure the handwriting settings such as:
Recognition type, Recognition time, Pen thickness, Pen color, Gesture
guide, Tutorial, and About.
• Advanced provides access to additional settings such as:

– Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of the first
word in each sentence (standard English style).

Changing Your Settings

377

– Auto-punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence by
tapping the space bar twice when using the on-screen QWERTY
keyboard.

– Character preview provides an automatic preview of the current
character selection within the text string. This is helpful when multiple
characters are available within one key.

– Key-tap vibration enables vibration feedback when you tap an
on-screen key.

– Key-tap sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an
on-screen key.
• Tutorial launches a brief on-screen tutorial covering the main concepts
related to the Samsung keyboard.
• Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their original
configuration.

Predictive Text - Advanced Settings
The predictive text system provides next-letter prediction and
regional error correction, which compensates for users pressing the
wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Language and input ➔
(adjacent to the Samsung keyboard field).
– or –
From within an active text entry screen, touch and hold
(Input Methods), drag across the icons, and select
(Settings) to reveal the Samsung keyboard settings screen.

378

2. In a single motion touch and slide the Predictive text slider to
the right to turn it on.
3. Tap the Predictive text field and configure any of the following
advanced options:
• Personalized data activate this feature to use the personal language
data that you have entered and selected to make your text entry
prediction results better. By enabling this feature you can choose from
the following personalization features:
• Learn from Gmail: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account
from where your style and existing contact information is added to your
personal dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names.
• Learn from Facebook allows you to log into your current Facebook
account and add used text to your personal dictionary.
• Learn from Twitter allows you to sign into your existing Twitter account
and add used text to your personal dictionary.
• Learn from Messaging allows your device to learn your messaging
style by using your Messaging information.
• Learn from Contacts updates predictive style by learning your Contacts
style.
• Clear personalized data removes all personalized data entered by the
user.
4. Press

to return to the previous screen.

Changing Your Settings

379

Configure Google Voice Typing
1. From the main Settings page, tap Language and input.
– or –
From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion,
touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the
screen, then select
(Choose input method) ➔ Set up
input methods.
2. Tap

(adjacent to the Google voice typing field).

3. Select a language by tapping Choose input languages area.
4. Remove the check mark from the Automatic field. This allows
you to select additional languages.
5. Select the desired languages.
6. Activate Block offensive words to block recognition of known
offensive words or language. (A green check mark indicates
the feature is active).
7. Tap Download offline speech recognition to enable speech
recognition via locally stored files so that even if you are not
connected to a network you can still use the service.

380

Configuring Voice Input Recognition
This feature allows the device to correctly recognize verbal input.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Language and input.
2. Tap Voice search to configure the following:
• Language: Choose a language for your voice input.
• Speech output: Sets whether you will use speech output always or only
when using hands-free.
• Block offensive words: Enable or disable blocking of recognized
offensive words from the results of your voice-input Google searches.
• Hotword detection: enable to being able to launch voice search by
saying the word “Google”.
• Download offline speech recognition: enables voice input while
offline.
• Personalized recognition: enables the improvement of speech
recognition accuracy.
• Google Account dashboard: allows you to manage your collected data.
• Bluetooth headset: records audio through a connected Bluetooth
headset.
3. Press

to return to the previous screen.

Changing Your Settings

381

Configuring Text-to-speech
This feature allows the device to provide a verbal readout of
on-screen data such as messages and incoming caller information.
This action is called TTS (Text To Speech).
1. From the main Settings page, tap Language and input ➔
Text-to-speech output.
2. Select a current Preferred TTS engine from the list of available
options. Select Google Text-to-speech Engine or Samsung TTS.
The default is Google Text-to-speech.
3. Tap
to configure the engine’s settings.
• Language: allows you to set the language for spoken text.
• Settings for Google Text-to-speech Engine: allows you to view Open
Source Licenses. Options include: Language, Settings for Google Textto-speech Engine, and Install voice data.
• Settings for Samsung TTS: allows you to configure the General settings
for the Samsung TTS. Options include: Language and Settings for
Samsung TTS.
• Install voice data: allows you to install voice data for speech synthesis.
4. Configure the General options to alter the settings associated
with this feature:
• Speech rate: adjusts the rate at which on-screen text is spoken by the
device. Choose from: Very slow, Slow, Normal, Fast, and Very fast.
• Listen to an example: plays a short example of what the text-to-speech
feature sounds like on your device when activated.
• Driving mode: incoming calls and new notifications are automatically
read out loud. In a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on.
382

– Once active, tap the Driving mode field to reveal the associated settings.
– Select those applications that will use TTS while driving mode is activated.
Choose from: Incoming call, Message, New emails, New voicemail,
Alarm, Schedule, or Unlock screen.

Configuring the Mouse-TrackPad
This feature allows you to configure the pointer speed for a
connected mouse or trackpad.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Language and input ➔
Pointer speed.
2. Adjust the slider and tap OK.

Back up and Reset
Location settings, backup configurations, or reset the phone to erase
all personal data.

From the main Settings page, tap Back up and reset.

Mobile Backup and Restore
The device can be configured to back up your current settings,
application data and settings.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Back up and reset.
2. Tap Back up my data to create a backup of your current phone
settings and applications.
3. Tap Backup account to assign the account being backed up.
4. Tap Automatic restore to assist in the re-installation of a
previously installed application (including preferences and
data).

Changing Your Settings

383

5. Tap Factory data reset to reset your device and sound settings
to the factory default settings. For more information, refer to
“Factory Data Reset” on page 384.

Prior to doing a Factory Reset
Before initiating a factory reset, it is recommended that you backup
your personal data prior to use.
To export a Contact list to your microSD card:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
2. Press

and then tap Import/Export.

3. Tap Export to SD card ➔ OK.
Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) ➔
(Gallery).
2. Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos.
3. Remove both the back cover and remove the internal microSD
card prior to initiating the process.

Factory Data Reset
From this menu you can reset your device and sound settings to the
factory default settings.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Back up and reset ➔ Factory
data reset.
2. Read the on-screen reset information.
3. Tap Reset device.
4. If necessary, enter your password and tap Delete all.
The device resets to the factory default settings automatically
and when finished displays the Home screen.
384

Add Account
This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize accounts,
including your Google and email accounts.

Adding an Account
1. From the main Settings page, navigate to the Accounts area.
2. Tap Add account and select one of the account types.
3. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your
credentials and set up the account.
4. A green circle will appear next to the account type once you
have created an account. Your email account will also be
displayed in the Accounts section of the main Settings menu.

Removing an Account
Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its messages,
contacts, and other data from the device.
1. From the main Settings page, navigate to the Accounts area.
2. Tap the account name.
3. From the Accounts area of the screen, tap the account entry.
4. Tap Remove account, then tap Remove account at the prompt to
remove the account and delete all its messages, contacts, and
other data.

Changing Your Settings

385

Synchronizing a Accounts
By default, all managed accounts are synchronized. You can also
manually sync all current accounts.
1. From the main Settings page, navigate to the Accounts area.
2. Tap the account name.
3. Tap the account name.
4. Tap Sync now to synchronize your account or tap Sync all to
synchronize all your accounts. Tap Cancel sync to stop the
synchronization.
5. Tap Settings to access your account settings.

Motion Settings
This feature allows you to assign specific functions to certain phone
actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope.
To activate motion:
1. From the main Settings page, tap Motion.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Motion slider to the right
to turn it on.
Note: If Motion activation is not enabled, all motion services are
greyed-out and disabled.
To activate different motion functions:

Tap the Motion activation field and activate the desired
on-screen motion option.
• Direct call: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently displayed
on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the device to your ear.
386

• Smart alert: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and notified
of you have missed any calls or messages.
• Double tap to top: Once enabled, double tap the top of the device to be
taken to the top of the current on-screen list.
• Tilt to zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where content
can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points on the
display then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out.
• Pan to move icon: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired application
shortcut icon or widget on the screen. Once it detaches, move the
device left or right to migrate it to a new location.
• Pan to browse images: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired onscreen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right to pan
vertically or up and down to pan horizontally around the large on-screen
image.
• Shake to update: Once enabled, shake your device to rescan for
Bluetooth devices, rescan for Wi-Fi devices, Refresh a Web page, etc.
• Turn over to mute/pause: Once enabled, mute incoming calls and any
playing sounds by turning the device over display down on a surface.
This is the opposite of the pickup to be notified gesture.
• Sensitivity settings and tutorial: Allows you to access the sensitivity
settings for the currently active gesture (page 388).
• Learn about motions: Provides on-screen descriptions for the motion
functionality.

Changing Your Settings

387

• Palm swipe to capture: Once enabled, you can capture any
on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single motion,
press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe form left to right.
The image is then copied to the clipboard.
• Palm touch to mute/pause: Once enabled, you can pause any onscreen video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen
with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the screen, the device
goes back to normal by either continuing to play the current video or
unmuting the current sound.
• Learn about hand motions: Provides on-screen descriptions for the
Palm to swipe and Palm touch to mute/pause functionality.
To adjust gesture sensitivity:
1. From the main Settings page, tap Motion ➔ Sensitivity
settings.
2. Tap an available field to access the sensitivity settings for the
currently active gesture. Choose from:
• Gyroscope calibration: Allows you to properly calibrate your device for
use with motion gestures.
• Tilt to zoom: Allows you to zoom in or out when in the Gallery or
Internet.
• Pan to move icon: Allows you to move an icon to another page.
• Pan to browse images: Allows you to move around an image when
zoomed in.
Note: Sensitivity settings are only accessible if the gesture is currently
active.
388

Accessory
This menu allows you to assign external speakers when the device is
docked.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Accessory.
2. Tap Dock sound to play sounds when inserting or removing the
phone from the dock.
3. Tap Audio output mode to use the external dock speakers when
the phone is docked.
4. Tap Desk home screen display to display the desk home screen
when the phone is docked.
5. Tap Audio output to set your Audio output to Stereo or
Surround.

Changing Your Settings

389

Date and Time
This menu allows you to change the current time and date displayed.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Date and time.
2. Tap Automatic data and time to allow the network set the date
and time.
Important! Deactivate Automatic data and time to manually set the rest
of the options.
3. Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the Month,
Day, and Year then tap Set.
4. Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons, set Hour, and
Minute. Tap PM or AM, then tap Set.
5. Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network set the time zone
information automatically.
6. Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone.
7. Tap Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected the device
automatically uses a 12-hour format.
8. Tap Select date format and select the date format type.

390

Accessibility Settings
This service lets you enable and disable downloaded accessibility
applications that aid in navigating your Android device, such as
TalkBack (uses synthesized speech to describe the results of
actions), KickBack (provides haptic feedback for actions), and
SoundBack (plays sounds for various actions). Also lets you enable
use of the power key to end calls.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Accessibility.
Note: Initially, it might be necessary to download accessibility
applications from the Play Store.
2. Select the Auto-rotate screen field to activate this feature
which automatically rotates an available screen.
3. Tap Screen timeout to timeout the accessibility feature after a
defined amount of time.
4. Tap Lock automatically to lock the screen automatically after a
selected amount of time.
Note: The Lock automatically function is only available if your device
is already using the screen lock feature.
5. Select the Speak passwords field to activate this feature which
reads out password information.
6. Select The power key ends calls field to activate this feature
which uses the
to end any current calls.

Changing Your Settings

391

7. Tap Accessibility shortcut to allow the accessibility shortcut
under the device options to be used by pressing and holding
the power key.
8. Tap TalkBack to activate the feature.
Note: TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback to help
blind and low-vision users.
Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter, except
passwords, including personal data and credit card
numbers. It may also log your user interface interactions
with the device.
9. Tap the Font size field to change the size of the fonts used on
the device within menus, options, etc..
Choose from: Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, or Huge.
10. Tap the Negative colors field to reverse the display of
on-screen colors from White text on a Black background to
Black text on a White background.
11. Tap the Text-to-speech output field to configure the text to
speech configuration parameters.
12. Tap the Enhance web accessibility field to allow apps to install
scripts from Google that make their Web content more
accessible.
13. Tap the Sound balance field to control the sound balance of the
media player while connected earphones are in use.
392

14. Tap the Mono audio field to enable stereo audio to be
compressed into a single mono audio stream for use with a
single earbud/earphone.
15. Tap the Turn off all sounds field to mute every sound made by
the device during taps, selections, notifications, etc..
16. Tap the Tap and hold delay field to select a time interval for this
action. Choose from: Short, Medium, or Long.

Developer Options
Use the Developer options to set options for application
development.
Important! These features are used for development purposes only.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Developer options.
2. The following options are available:
• Desktop backup password: Allows you to protect your desktop with a
backup password ID.
• Stay awake: with the Stay awake option enabled, your screen will never
sleep while you are charging the device.
• Protect SD card: Requires apps to ask your permission before
accessing data on your SD card.
• USB debugging: Allows debugging when the device is attached to a PC
by a USB cable.
• Allow mock locations: Used by developers when developing locationbased applications.

Changing Your Settings

393

• Select app to be debugged: Allows developers to select a specific app
to debug.
• Wait for debugger: Specified apps must have debugger attached
before executing.
• Show touches: Displays touch interactions on the screen.
• Show pointer location: Highlights the data that was touched on the
screen.
• Show layout boundaries: Displays clip bounds, margins, etc.
• Show GPU view updates: Flashes views inside windows when drawn
with GPU.
• Show screen updates: Forces areas of the screen to flash as it is
updated.
• Window animation scale: Configure the scale for animation (ranges
from off to 10x).
• Transition animation scale: Configure the scale for transitioning when
using animation (ranges from off to 10x).
• Animator duration scale: Configure the scale for duration when using
animation (ranges from off to 10x).
• Disable hardware overlays: Assigns the work of rendering to the GPU.
• Force GPU rendering: Uses a 2D acceleration in applications.
• Strict mode: Makes the screen flash when applications perform long
operations on the main thread.
• Show CPU usage: Screen highlights the current CPU usage.
• GPU rendering profile: Allows you to set the adb shell to measure
rendering.
394

• Enable traces: Enables/disables on-screen tracing based on an
available parameter.
• Do not keep activities: Destroys every activity as soon as the
application is closed.
• Limit background processes: Sets the number of processes that can
run in the background.
• Show all ANRs: Displays a prompt when applications running in the
background are not responding.

USB Debugging
When enabled, allows debugging when the device is attached to a
PC by a USB cable.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Developer options.
2. Tap USB debugging to enable or disable the setting. When
enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.

Allowing Mock Locations
Note: This feature is used for development purposes only.
If you are a developer who is testing a GPS applications using this
device, you can tell the device that the phone is at different GPS
locations. In other words, the phone is allowed to “mock” the
coordinates.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Developer options.
2. Verify the Developer options are active.
3. Tap Allow mock locations to enable or disable the setting.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
Changing Your Settings

395

Desktop Backup Password
Protect the desktop with a backup password ID.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Developer options
2. Verify the Developer options are active.
3. Tap Desktop backup password.
4. In the Settings screen, enter the current full backup password,
the new password for full backups, then enter the new
password again.
5. Tap Set backup password to save the password change.

Application Options
1. From the main Settings page, tap Developer options.
2. Verify the Developer options are active.
3. Tap Do not keep activities to destroy every activity as soon as
the application is closed.
4. Tap Limit background processes to set the number of
processes that can run in the background. Options are:
Standard limit, No background processes, and 1 to 4
processes at most.
5. Tap Show all ANRs to display a prompt when applications
running in the background are not responding.

396

About Device
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial information,
and other phone information such as the model number, firmware
version, baseband version, kernel version, and software build
number.
To access phone information:

From the main Settings page, tap About device. The following
information displays:
• Software updates: allows you to connect to the network and upload any
new phone software directly to your device. The device automatically
updates with the latest available software when you access this option.
• Status: displays the Battery status, Battery level (as a percentage),
Network, Signal strength, Mobile network type, Service state, Roaming,
Mobile network state, My phone number, MIN, PRL version, MEID, IP
address, Wi-Fi MAC address, Bluetooth address, Up time, and Device
status.
• Legal information: This option displays information about Open source
licences, License settings, as well as Google legal information. This
information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal information
and facts as well as Google Terms of Service, Terms of Service for
Android-powered Phones, and much more pertinent information as a
reference.
Read the information and terms, then press
to return to the
Settings menu.

Changing Your Settings

397

Tip: To find your device’s DivX® registration code and information
about registering your device to play DivX protected video, tap
License settings ➔DivX® VOD.
• Model number: displays the device’s model number.
• Android version: displays the firmware version loaded on this device.
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on this
device.
• Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this device.
• Build number: displays the software, build number.
• Hardware version: displays the hardware version of this device.
Note: Firmware, baseband, kernel and build numbers are usually used
for updates to the handset or support. For additional information
please contact your service representative.

System Updates
The System Update feature enables you to use your device to
connect to the network and upload any new software directly to your
device. The device automatically updates with the latest available
software when you access this option.
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status
at a glance:
Displays when the System update feature is active.
Displays when the System update feature is in progress.

398

To update your device:
1. From the main Settings page, tap About device ➔ System
updates.
2. Read the information screen and select Check now.
3. If an update is available, follow the on-screen instructions.

Changing Your Settings

399

Section 11: Health and Safety
Information
This device is capable of operating in Wi-Fi™ mode in the 2.4 and
5 GHz bands. The FCC requires that devices operating within 5.155.25 GHz may only be used indoors, not outside, in order to avoid
interference with Mobile Satellite Services (MSS). Therefore, this
device is restricted from being used outdoors when operating in
frequencies between 5.15-5.25 GHz.
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using
your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone” are used in
this section to refer to your phone. Read this information before using
your mobile device.

Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF) exposure
from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes the following
information:

Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause
cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of scientific
evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems.
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Over the
past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds of studies looking
at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy emitted by cell
phones. While some researchers have reported biological changes
associated with RF energy, these studies have failed to be
400

replicated. The majority of studies published have failed to show an
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell phone
and health problems.
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at substantially
reduced time intervals when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high
levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure
to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no
known adverse health effects.
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be
confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic
energy.
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in
X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is a
process where electrons are stripped away from their normal
locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage
biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material.
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy, including
both radio waves and microwaves, are not great enough to cause
ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore, RF energy is a type of
non-ionizing radiation. Other types of non-ionizing radiation include
visible light, infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of
electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies.
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two areas of
the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly vulnerable to RF
heating because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry
away excess heat.
Health and Safety Information

401

Research Results to Date: Is there a connection between RF
and certain health problems?
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In addition,
attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have shown a
connection have failed.
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the weight
of scientific evidence does not show an association between
exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones and adverse
health outcomes. Still the scientific community has supported
additional research to address gaps in knowledge. Some of these
studies are described below.
Interphone Study
Interphone is a large international study designed to determine
whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer. A
report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology (June,
2010) compared cell phone usage for more than 5,000 people with
brain tumors (glioma and meningioma) and a similar number of
healthy controls.
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain
cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk of brain
cancer from using cell phones. For people with the heaviest use of
cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour per day, every day, for
over 10 years) the study suggested a slight increase in brain cancer.
However, the authors determined that biases and errors prevented
any conclusions being drawn from this data. Additional information
about Interphone can be found at
http://www.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/2010/pdfs/pr200_E.pdf.

402

Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did not
answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional research is
being conducted around the world, and the FDA continues to monitor
developments in this field.
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users (COSMOS)
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health monitoring of a
large group of people to determine if there are any health issues
linked to long-term exposure to radio frequency energy from cell
phone use. The COSMOS study will follow approximately 300,000
adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional
information about the COSMOS study can be found at
http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html.
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency
Fields in Childhood and Adolescence (MOBI-KIDS)
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship
between exposure to radio frequency energy from communication
technologies including cell phones and brain cancer in young people.
This is an international multi-center study involving 14 European and
non-European countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS
can be found at
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/
view.php?ID=39.
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program
of the National Cancer Institute
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer statistics
in the United States to detect any change in rates of new cases for
brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk for brain cancer, rates
should go up, because heavy cell phone use has been common for
quite some time in the U.S. Between 1987 and 2005, the overall
Health and Safety Information
403

age-adjusted incidence of brain cancer did not increase. Additional
information about SEER can be found at
http://seer.cancer.gov/.
Cell Phone Industry Actions
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory
actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a number
of steps, including the following:
• Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF for the type
of signal emitted by cell phones;
• Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user;
and
• Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current information
on cell phone use and human health concerns.
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting bodies such
as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), the
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection
(ICNIRP), and others to assure that safety standards continue to
adequately protect the public.

Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories

Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy (RF)
from cell phones - and at this point we do not know that there is - it
is probably very small. But, if you are concerned about avoiding even
potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your RF
exposure.
• Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;
404

• Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your head
and the cell phone.
Hands-Free Kits
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets and
various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-clips and
holsters. Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy
absorption from cell phones.
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone is
held away from the head in the user's hand or in approved
body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in the U.S. are
required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when used
against the head and against the body.
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions
from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free kits
reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for convenience and
comfort. They are also required by law in many states if you want to
use your phone while driving.
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from RF
Radiation
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions
from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories
which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks.
Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use
special phone cases, while others involve nothing more than a
metallic accessory attached to the phone.

Health and Safety Information

405

Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as
advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields” may
interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may be
forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in
RF absorption.

Children and Cell Phones
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of cell
phones from RF exposure, including children and teenagers. The
steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to children and
teenagers as well.
• Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;

• Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the head
and the cell phone.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at all.
For example, The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom made
such a recommendation in December 2000. In this report, a group of
independent experts noted that no evidence exists that using a cell
phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their
recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly
precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any
health hazard exists.
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various
sources can be obtained from the following organizations (updated
10/1/2010):
• FCC RF Safety Program:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.
406

• Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.

• Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/.
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)

• National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.

• World Health Organization (WHO):
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.

• International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:
http://www.icnirp.de.

• Health Protection Agency:
http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.

• US Food and Drug Administration:
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/
HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm.

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
Certification Information
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed
and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for Radio
Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National Council
on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and the Institute of
Health and Safety Information

407

Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). In both cases, the
recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering
experts drawn from industry, government, and academia after
extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the biological
effects of RF energy.
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones
employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption
Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF
energy by the human body expressed in units of watts per kilogram
(W/kg). The FCC requires wireless phones to comply with a safety
limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give
additional protection to the public and to account for any variations
in measurements.
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest
certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR
is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR
level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum
reported value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at
multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach
the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station
antenna, the lower the power output of the phone.
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public, it must
be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the SAR
limit established by the FCC. Tests for each model phone are
performed in positions and locations (e.g. at the ear and worn on the
body) as required by the FCC. For body-worn operation, this phone
408

has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used
with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the
mobile device a minimum of 1.0cm from the body.
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF
exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an Equipment
Authorization for this mobile device with all reported SAR levels
evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines.
This mobile phone has a FCC ID number: A3LSCHI535 [Model
Number: SCH-S968C] and the specific SAR levels for this mobile
phone can be found at the following FCC website:http://www.fcc.gov/
oet/ea/.
The SAR information for this device can also be found on Samsung’s
website: http://www.samsung.com/sar.
SAR information on this and other model phones can be accessed
online on the FCC's website through http://transition.fcc.gov/oet/
rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that pertains to a particular
model phone, this site uses the phone FCC ID number which is
usually printed somewhere on the case of the phone. Sometimes it
may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find the number.
Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the
instructions on the website and it should provide values for typical or
maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional SAR information can
also be obtained at
http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sar-cellulartelephones.

Health and Safety Information

409

FCC Part 15 Information to User
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned that
changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung could
void your authority to operate the device.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
410

Commercial Mobile Alerting System
(CMAS)
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from
the Commercial Mobile Alerting System ("CMAS"; which may also be
known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network ("PLAN")). If your
wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are
available while in the provider's coverage area. If you travel outside
your provider's coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be
available. For more information, please contact your wireless
provider.

Smart Practices While Driving
On the Road - Off the Phone

The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of his
or her vehicle.
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be
performed while driving whether it be eating, drinking, talking to
passengers, or talking on a mobile phone - unless the driver has
assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the secondary
task will not interfere with their primary responsibility. Do not engage
in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to
take your eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes impaired.
Samsung is committed to promoting responsible driving and giving
drivers the tools they need to understand and address distractions.
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and their
accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them. The use
of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. For
example, only hands-free use may be permitted in certain areas.
Health and Safety Information

411

Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the call go
to voicemail when driving conditions require. Remember, driving
comes first, not the call!
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these tips:

• Use a hands-free device;
• Secure your phone within easy reach;
• Place calls when you are not moving;
• Plan calls when your car will be stationary;
• Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;
• Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving and
will suspend the call if necessary;

• Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an
automobile:
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or near
the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law may permit
mounting this device only in specific locations in the automobile. Be
sure to consult the state and local laws or ordinances where you
drive before mounting this device in an automobile. Failure to comply
with these restrictions could result in fines, penalties, or other
damages.
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the driver's
clear view of the street and traffic.

412

Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video games while
operating a vehicle.
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org.

Battery Use and Safety

Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or
damage. Most battery issues arise from improper handling
of batteries and, particularly, from the continued use of
damaged batteries.

• Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt to
change the form of your battery. Do not put a high degree of pressure on
the battery. This can cause leakage or an internal short-circuit, resulting in
overheating.

• Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids. Liquids
can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion. Even when the
phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally, the circuitry
could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard. If the phone and/or battery
get wet, have them checked by your service provider or contact Samsung,
even if they appear to be working properly.

• Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive heating
can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the phone or the
battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or
heat source such as a microwave oven, hair dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid
leaving your phone in your car in high temperatures.
Health and Safety Information

413

• Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone or the
battery may explode when overheated.

• Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking battery
fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For safe disposal
options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized service center.

• Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the battery,
especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the phone
and battery. If you suspect damage to the phone or battery, take it to a
service center for inspection.

• Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.
• Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key, jewelry, clip,
or pen) causes a direct connection between the + and - terminals of the
battery (metal strips on the battery), for example when you carry a spare
battery in a pocket or bag. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the
battery or the object causing the short-circuiting.
Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and recharge your
battery only with Samsung-approved chargers which are
specifically designed for your phone.
WARNING!
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may present a risk
of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. Samsung's warranty does
not cover damage to the phone caused by nonSamsung-approved
batteries and/or chargers.

414

• Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers. Some
websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable
manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even
counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase
manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories. If
unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible,
contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.

• Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and charging
devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible risk
of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious injuries, damages to
your phone, or other serious hazard.

Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its customers to
recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine Samsung accessories.
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only
important for safety, it benefits the environment. Batteries must be
recycled or disposed of properly.
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and
accessories may not be available in your area.
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile
device by working with respected take-back companies in every
state in the country.
Drop It Off
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device and
batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung
Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these locations may be
found at:
Health and Safety Information

415

http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp.
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted at
these locations for no fee.
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations where
mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional information
regarding specific locations may be found at:
http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/index.htm
or at http://www.call2recycle.org/.
Mail It In
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide Samsung
customers with a free recycling mailing label. Just go to
http://fun.samsungmobileusa.com/recycling/index.jsp and follow the
instructions to print out a free pre-paid postage label and then
send your old mobile device or battery to the address listed, via
U.S. Mail, for recycling.
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved recycler.
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect
Or call, (877) 278-0799.
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices
and batteries
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with local
regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these items in household
or business trash may be prohibited. Help us protect the
environment - recycle!
416

Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may
explode.

UL Certified Travel Charger
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL safety
requirements. Please adhere to the following safety instructions per
UL guidelines:
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY LEAD TO
SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE PROPERTY DAMAGE.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH AMERICA,
USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF THE PROPER
CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER OUTLET.
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY
ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR
MOUNT POSITION.

Display / Touch-Screen

Please note the following information when using your mobile
device:

Health and Safety Information

417

WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or acrylic
and could break if your mobile device is dropped or if it
receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is broken or
cracked as this could cause injury to you.
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH-SCREEN
MOBILE DEVICE
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, please note
that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch from the
pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive
force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch-screen
may damage the tempered glass surface and void the
warranty. For more information, please refer to the “Standard
Limited Warranty”.

GPS & AGPS
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS uses
satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are subject to
changes implemented in accordance with the Department of
Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP).
Changes may affect the performance of location-based technology
on your mobile device.
Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global
Positioning System (AGPS), which obtains information from the
cellular network to improve GPS performance. AGPS uses your

418

wireless service provider's network and therefore airtime, data
charges, and/or additional charges may apply in accordance with
your service plan. Contact your wireless service provider for details.
Your Location
Location-based information includes information that can be used to
determine the approximate location of a mobile device. Mobile
devices which are connected to a wireless network transmit
location-based information. Additionally, if you use applications that
require location-based information (e.g. driving directions), such
applications transmit location-based information. The location-based
information may be shared with third-parties, including your wireless
service provider, applications providers, Samsung, and other
third-parties providing services.
Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls
When you make an emergency call, the cellular network may
activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the emergency
responders your approximate location.
AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area. Therefore:
• Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your
ability; and

• Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder
instructs you.
Navigation
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data relating
to your current location, may contain inaccurate or incomplete data,
and circumstances can and do change over time. In some areas,
complete information may not be available. Therefore, you should
always visually confirm that the navigational instructions are
Health and Safety Information

419

consistent with what you see before following them. All users should
pay attention to road conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors
that may impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road
signs.

Emergency Calls
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates using
radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well as
user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee connection in
all conditions, areas, or circumstances.
Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless mobile
device for essential communications (medical emergencies, for
example). Before traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas, plan
an alternate method of contacting emergency services personnel.
Remember, to make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be
switched on and in a service area with adequate signal strength.
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile device
networks or when certain network services and/or mobile device
features are in use. Check with local service providers.
To make an emergency call:
1. If the mobile device is not on, switch it on.
2. From the Home screen, tap

3. Key in the emergency number for your present location (for
example, 911 or other official emergency number). Emergency
numbers vary by location.
4. Tap

420

If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you may
first need to deactivate those features before you can make an
emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your local cellular
service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to give
all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Remember
that your mobile device may be the only means of communication at
the scene of an accident; do not cut off the call until given
permission to do so.

Care and Maintenance
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship
and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you
fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for
many years:
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:
Liquids of any kind
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and liquids
contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If the mobile
device does get wet, do not accelerate drying with the use of an
oven, microwave, or dryer, because this may damage the mobile
device and could cause a fire or explosion.
Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so may
cause an electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device.
Extreme heat or cold
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C / 113°F.
Microwaves
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven. Doing
so may cause a fire or explosion.
Health and Safety Information

421

Dust and dirt
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.
Cleaning solutions
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft cloth
slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution.
Shock or vibration
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough handling
can break internal circuit boards.
Paint
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the device’s
moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper
operation.

Responsible Listening

Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss.
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud sounds
over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is played
louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to loud sounds
(including music) is the most common cause of preventable hearing
loss. Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio
devices, such as portable music players and cell phones, at high
volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent
noise-induced hearing loss.
This includes the use of headphones (including headsets, earbuds,
and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud
sound has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a
422

ringing in the ear), hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing.
Individual susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound produced
by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the
sound, the device settings, and the headphones that are used. As a
result, there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for
everyone or for every combination of sound, settings, and
equipment.
You should follow some common sense recommendations when
using any portable audio device:
• Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio
source.

• Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at
which you can hear adequately.

• Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time, not
realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing.

• When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the
people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what
you are listening to.

• Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you choose
to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use
noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental
noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling
headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than
when using earbuds.

• Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time is
required before you hearing could be affected.
Health and Safety Information

423

• Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such as
rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary
hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal.

• Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you experience
ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or experience any temporary
hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device, discontinue
use and consult your doctor.
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the
following sources:
American Academy of Audiology
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300
Reston, VA 20190
Voice: (800) 222-2336
Email: info@audiology.org
Internet:
http://www.audiology.org/Pages/
default.aspx
National Institute on Deafness and Other
Communication Disorders
National Institutes of Health
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320
Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov
Internet:
http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/
424

National Institute for Occupational Safety
and Health (NIOSH)
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200
Patriots Plaza Building
Washington, DC 20201
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH
(1-800-356-4674)
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328
Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov
Internet:
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/
default.html
1-888-232-6348 TTY

Operating Environment
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and
always switch your mobile device off whenever it is forbidden to use
it, or when it may cause interference or danger. When connecting the
mobile device or any accessory to another device, read its user's
guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible
products.
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio Frequency
(RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment may not be
shielded against the RF signals from your wireless mobile device.
Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives.
Health and Safety Information

425

Implantable Medical Devices
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable
medical device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter
defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device.
Persons who have such devices:
• Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches from their
implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON;

• Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;
• Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to minimize
the potential for interference;

• Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason to
suspect that interference is taking place;

• Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your
implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using your
wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device, consult your
health care provider.
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html#.
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded
from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in
obtaining this information. Switch your mobile device off in health
care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct
you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using
equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy.
426

Vehicles
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded
electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer
or its representative regarding your vehicle before using your mobile
device in a motor vehicle. You should also consult the manufacturer
of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle.
Posted Facilities
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices
require you to do so.
Potentially Explosive Environments
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially
explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in
such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury
or even death. Users are advised to switch the mobile device off
while at a refueling point (service station).
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of
radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas),
chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas
with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always,
clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer
or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals or
particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any other area
where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine.

Health and Safety Information

427

When your Device is Wet
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is already on,
turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if the device will not
turn off or you cannot remove the battery, leave it as-is). Then, dry
the device with a towel and take it to a service center.

FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices
The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established
requirements for digital wireless mobile devices to be compatible
with hearing aids and other assistive hearing devices.
When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices (hearing
aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile devices, they may
detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some hearing devices
are more immune than others to this interference noise, and mobile
devices also vary in the amount of interference they generate.
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system for
wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find mobile
devices that may be compatible with their hearing devices. Not all
mobile devices have been rated. Mobile devices that are rated have
the rating on their box or a label located on the box.
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending on the
user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing device
happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to use
a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out the mobile device with
your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal
needs.

428

M-Ratings: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing
devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. M4 is the better/
higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to enabling acoustic
coupling with hearing aids that do not operate in telecoil mode.
T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and
are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than
mobile devices that are not labeled. T4 is the better/higher of the two
ratings. T-ratings refer to enabling inductive coupling with hearing
aids operating in telecoil mode.
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid manufacturer or
hearing health professional may help you find this rating. Higher
ratings mean that the hearing device is relatively immune to
interference noise.
Under the current industry standard, American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and wireless mobile device
rating values are added together to indicate how usable they are
together. For example, if a hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and
the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the
two values equals M5.
Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user with
normal use while using the hearing aid with the particular wireless
mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would indicate excellent
performance.
However, these are not guarantees that all users will be satisfied. T
ratings work similarly.

Health and Safety Information

429

The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19 standard.
HAC for Newer Technologies
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for
some of the wireless technologies that it uses. However, there may
be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone that have
not been tested yet for use with hearing aids.
It is important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly
and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear implant,
to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult your service
provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information on hearing
aid compatibility. If you have questions about return or exchange
policies, consult your service provider or phone retailer.

430

Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it
because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the mobile
device, or make calls that increase your mobile device bill.
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of the
reach of small children.

FCC Notice and Cautions
FCC Notice

The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in
close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you to
stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be
eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane
or butane) must comply with the National Fire Protection Standard
(NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact the National Fire
Protection Association.
Cautions
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly
approved in this document could void your warranty for this
equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment. Only
use approved batteries, antennas, and chargers. The use of any
unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile
device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the
mobile device.
Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of
equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or
sitting on it.
Health and Safety Information

431

Other Important Safety Information
• Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the
mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous
and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device.

• Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your
vehicle are securely mounted.

• Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your vehicle
is mounted and operating properly.

• When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can build up
in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical shock. To minimize
the risk of electrostatic discharge from the headset avoid using the
headset in extremely dry environments or touch a grounded unpainted
metal object to discharge static electricity before inserting the headset.

• Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in
the same compartment as the mobile device, its parts, or accessories.

• For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates
with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable
wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in the air bag
deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air
bag inflates, serious injury could result.

• Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use of
wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to the
aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate authorities before using any
function of a mobile device while on an aircraft.

• Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or denial
of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or both.
432

• While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do not hold
the screen too close to your eyes.

• Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing lights
while watching videos or playing games for extended periods. If you feel
any discomfort, stop using the device immediately.

• Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively perform
actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a touch screen with
your fingers, or playing games, you may experience occasional discomfort
in your hands, neck, shoulders, or other parts of your body. When using
your device for extended periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip,
press the keys lightly, and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have
discomfort during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.

• If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or light close
to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]

End User License Agreement for Software
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement
("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a
single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") for
software, owned by Samsung and its affiliated companies and its
third party suppliers and licensors, that accompanies this EULA,
which includes computer software and may include associated
media, printed materials, "online" or electronic documentation in
connection with your use of this device ("Software").
This device requires the use of preloaded software in its normal
operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED SOFTWARE,
YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT
THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE.
Health and Safety Information

433

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following rights
provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA:
You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of the
Software on the local hard disk(s) or other permanent storage media
of one computer and use the Software on a single computer or a
mobile device at a time, and you may not make the Software
available over a network where it could be used by multiple
computers at the same time. You may make one copy of the
Software in machine readable form for backup purposes only;
provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other
proprietary notices contained on the original.
Certain items of the Software may be subject to open source
licenses. The open source license provisions may override some of
the terms of this EULA. We make the applicable open source
licenses available to you on the Legal Notices section of the Settings
menu of your device.
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung reserves all
rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software is
protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and
treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the title, copyright and other
intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is licensed,
not sold.
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to discover the source
code or algorithms of, the Software (except and only to the extent
that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law not
withstanding this limitation), or modify, or disable any features of,

434

the Software, or create derivative works based on the Software. You
may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting
services with the Software.
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as part
of the product support services related to the Software provided to
you, if any, such as IMEI (your device’s unique identification number),
device number, model name, customer code, access recording, your
device’s current SW version, MCC (Mobile Country Code), MNC
(Mobile Network Code). Samsung and its affiliates may use this
information solely to improve their products or to provide customized
services or technologies to you and will not disclose this information
in a form that personally identifies you. At all times your information
will be treated in accordance with Samsung’s Privacy Policy, which
can be viewed at:
http://account.samsung.com/membership/pp.
5. SOFTWARE UPDATES. Samsung may provide to you or make
available to you updates, upgrades, supplements and add-on
components (if any) of the Software, including bug fixes, service
upgrades (parts or whole), products or devices, and updates and
enhancements to any software previously installed (including entirely
new versions), (collectively “Update”) after the date you obtain your
initial copy of the Software to improve the Software and ultimately
enhance your user experience with your device. This EULA applies to
all and any component of the Update that Samsung may provide to
you or make available to you after the date you obtain your initial
copy of the Software, unless we provide other terms along with such
Update. To use Software provided through Update, you must first be
licensed for the Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the
Health and Safety Information

435

Update. After the Update, you may no longer use the Software that
formed the basis for your Update eligibility. The updated Software
version may add new functions and, in some limited cases, may
delete existing functions.
While the Update will be generally available, in some limited
circumstances, the Software updates will only be offered by your
network carrier, and such Software updates will be governed by your
contractual relationship with your network carrier.
With the “Automatic Update” function enabled (as in the default
setting in the System Update menu in the Setting), your device
downloads some Updates automatically from time to time. Your
device will, however, ask for your consent before installing any
Update If you choose to disable the “Automatic Update” function,
then you can check the availability of new Updates by clicking on the
“Check Update” menu in the Setting. We recommend that you check
availability of any new Updates periodically for optimal use of your
device. If you want to avoid any use of network data for the Update
downloads, then you should choose the “Wi-Fi Only” option in the
Setting. (Regardless of the option you choose, the “Automatic
Update” function downloads Updates only through Wi-Fi connection.)
6. Some features of the Software may require your device to have
access to the internet and may be subject to restrictions imposed by
your network or internet provider. Unless your device is connected to
the internet through Wi-Fi connection, the Software will access
through your mobile network, which may result in additional charges
depending on your payment plan. In addition, your enjoyment of
some features of the Software may be affected by the suitability and
performance of your device hardware or data access.
436

7. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or the rights
to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it is in
connection with the sale of the mobile device which the Software
accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include all of the
Software (including all component parts, the media and printed
materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not retain any
copies of the Software. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer,
such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving
the Software must agree to all the EULA terms.
8. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software is
subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply
to the Software, including all the applicable export restriction laws
and regulations.
9. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your rights
under this License will terminate automatically without notice from
Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of
this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you must cease all use of
the Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of the Software.
10. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. UNLESS SEPARATELY STATED IN A
WRITTEN EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY ACCOMPANYING YOUR
DEVICE, ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY SAMSUNG WITH THIS MOBILE
DEVICE (WHETHER INCLUDED WITH THE DEVICE, DOWNLOADED, OR
OTHERWISE OBTAINED) IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS
AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM
SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT
POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
Health and Safety Information

437

SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY,
LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER
ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG OR ITS
AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER BY
SAMSUNG OF WARRANTY REGARDING THE SOFTWARE, OR TO
CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY SORT FROM SAMSUNG.
11. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third party applications may
be included with, or downloaded to this mobile device. Samsung
makes no representations whatsoever about any of these
applications. Since Samsung has no control over such applications,
you acknowledge and agree that Samsung is not responsible for the
availability of such applications and is not responsible or liable for
any content, advertising, products, services, or other materials on or
available from such applications. You expressly acknowledge and
agree that use of third party applications is at your sole risk and that
the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality, performance, accuracy and
effort is with you. It is up to you to take precautions to ensure that
whatever you select to use is free of such items as viruses, worms,
Trojan horses, and other items of a destructive nature. References on
this mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of any
third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you, and do not
constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship, or
recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its products
and services. You agree that Samsung shall not be responsible or
438

liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage or loss, including but not
limited to any damage to the mobile device or loss of data, caused or
alleged to be caused by, or in connection with, use of or reliance on
any such third party content, products, or services available on or
through any such application. You acknowledge and agree that the
use of any third-party application is governed by such third party
application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement, Privacy
Policy, or other such agreement and that any information or personal
data you provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to such
third-party application provider, will be subject to such third party
application provider's privacy policy, if such a policy exists.
SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE
OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY
APPLICATION PROVIDER. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY
WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION
IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE
USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY
SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.
12. SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS. Certain Samsung applications and
services may be included with, or downloaded to, this mobile device.
Many of them require Samsung Services membership registration
(“Samsung Account”), and your rights and obligations will be set
forth in separate Samsung Account terms and conditions and privacy
policies. There are non-Samsung Account applications and services
that require your consent to their separate terms and conditions and
privacy policies. You expressly acknowledge and agree that your use
of such applications and services will be subject to the applicable
terms and conditions and privacy policies.

Health and Safety Information

439

13. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE
USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD
PARTY APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO
ERRORS, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO
CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES, AND ALL
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR
LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOTWITHSTANDING THE
FOREGOING, SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU
FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR
THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY
OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT
PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY
SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS
MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND
DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING SECTIONS 10, 11, 12 AND 13) SHALL
APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
14. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software
is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as "commercial items"
consisting of "commercial software" and "commercial software
440

documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all other end
users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. All Products are
provided only with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are
granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions
herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to Federal
Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19.
15. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of the
jurisdiction where you are a resident or, if a resident of the United
States, by the laws of the state of Texas, without regard to its conflict
of law provisions. This EULA shall not be governed by the UN
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the
application of which is expressly excluded.
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION.
(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or
difference arising in any way from this EULA or your use of the
Software is not amicably settled, it shall be subject to the nonexclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the jurisdiction where you are a
resident. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Samsung may apply for
injunctive remedies (or an equivalent type of urgent legal relief) in
any jurisdiction.
(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING
IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING
ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute
shall not be combined or consolidated with any other person’s or
entity’s claim or dispute, and specifically, without limitation of the
foregoing, shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a
class action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount, the
Health and Safety Information

441

relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall be
conducted according to the American Arbitration Association (AAA)
Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This
arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration
Act. The laws of the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of
laws principles, shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator
shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this
arbitration provision and the EULA. For any arbitration in which your
total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness
fees, are $5,000.00 or less ("Small Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees
and costs as part of any award, but may not grant Samsung its
attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined
that the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case, you
shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative,
facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less,
and Samsung shall pay the remainder of such fees. Administrative,
facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage
claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed
$5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be determined according to AAA
rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to the
prevailing party, or apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney
fees, expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on
the arbitrator's award in any court of competent jurisdiction. This
arbitration provision also applies to claims against Samsung’s
employees, representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises
from the licensing or use of the Software. You may opt out of this
dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung no later
442

than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer
purchaser’s purchase of this device. To opt out, you must send notice
by e-mail to optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line:
"Arbitration Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your
name and address; (b) the date on which the device was purchased;
(c) the device model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI or
MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI or MEID
or Serial Number can be found (i) on the device box; (ii) on the device
information screen, which can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a
label on the back of the device beneath the battery, if the battery is
removable; and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not
removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling
1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the
first consumer purchaser's purchase of the device and providing the
same information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of
this dispute resolution procedure will not affect your use of the
device or its preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the
benefits of this license.
17. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the entire
agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software and
supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written
communications, proposals and representations with respect to the
Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If any
provision of this EULA is held to be void, invalid, unenforceable or
illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full force and effect.
[050113]

Health and Safety Information

443

Index
Numerics
2 Sec Pause
Adding 84

A
ABC 107
Accessing
Recently-used
applications 70
Voicemail 27
Accessory 389
Audio Output 389
Dock Sound 389
Screen Display 389
Accounts and Sync
Adding Contacts 141
Add 2 Sec Pause 87, 129
Add to Favorites 149
Adjusting
Call volume 93
Airplane Mode 330
Alarm
Deleting an Existing Alarm
256
Setting 254
Turning Off 256
Alerts
Presidential 163
444

Alerts on Call 338
Allowing Mock Locations 395
AllShare Cast
Activation 336
On 245, 336
AllShare Cast Hub 44
1st Time Pairing 245
Activation on Device 245
Connecting 243
Disconnecting Your Device
246
Dongle 245
NFC Connection 333
Pairing 245
Pairing Your Devices 245
Re-pairing a Device 246
Set Up Hardware 243
AllShare Play
Group Play 204
see Samsung Link 239,
285
AllShareCast Hub 286
AMBER Alerts
Disable 164

AMBER alerts 163
Answering a call 84
Answering Key 338
Application cache and data
Clearing 281
Application Menus
Navigating through 68
Applications 54
Calculator 249
Camera 253
Email 258
Google Mail 259
Google Maps 264
Hide 55
Internet 262
messaging 268
My Account Downloader
269
Sharing with Others 73
Show Hidden 55
Shutting Down 29
Storage Used 360
Using the Camcorder 209
Using the Camera 186
Video Player 287
Voice Recorder 288
YouTube 290
Applications and
Development 248

Applications settings
allow mock locations 394
Apps
Adding 53
Apps Screen
Customizing 54
Audio
Output Mode 389
Auto Reject
Configuration 86
Auto Reject List 337
Auto Reject Mode 337
Auto Share Shot 193
Auto Sync App Data 130
Automatic Answering 338
Automatic Restore 383

B
Back up
My Account 383
My Data 383
Backup and Restore 383
Battery
Charging 15
Display Percentage 17,
352
Extending Life 18
Installing 14
Low Battery Indicator 17
Removal 14
445

Wall Charger 15
Battery Cover
Removal 11
Replace 11
Battery Life
Extending 18
Battery Usage 357
Battery Use & Safety 413
Bigger Font
Setting 392
Bing
Set Search Engine 305
Bluetooth 327
About 307
Change Name 308
Configure Device Settings
311
Deleting a Paired Device
312
Device Name 328
Disconnecting a Paired
Device 312
Media Audio 311
Microhone Function 311
Off 307, 327
On 307, 327
Outgoing Headset
Condition 338, 342
Paring Devices 310
446

Review Downloaded Files
309
Scan for Devices 309
Scanning for other Devices
328
Sending Contact
Information 313
Sending Contacts Via 313
Sending Namecard 138
Set Visibility 308
Settings 308
Status indicators 307
Switching to Headset
during call 95
Turning on and off 307,
327
Visibility 328
Visible Time-Out 309
Browser
Adding bookmarks 300
Deleting bookmarks 301
Easier to Read Pages 304
Emptying cookies 301
Entering a URL 295
Inverted Display 304
Navigation 293
Options 294
Quick Controls 306
Search Engine 305

Settings 303
Bubble
Options 159
Buddy Photo Share 189
Burst Shot 190

C
Calculator
Scientific Functions 249
Calendar
Creating an event 251
Settings 251
Sync 251
Calibrate Screen 60
Calibration 388
Call
Settings 84, 85
Call Alert 337
Call Vibrations 337
Call Answering/Ending 338
Call Functions 79
Answering 84
Background Calling 81
Ending 81
Ending a Call 81
Ending via Status Bar 81
Making a Multi-Party Call
97
Pause Dialing 87

Redialing the last number
88
Wait dialing 88
Call Functons
Vibrate 339
Call Restriction 85, 337
Call Settings 337
Additional Settings 343
General 337
Call Sound
Setting 97
Call Status Tones 337
Call Vibrations 337
Call Volume
Adjusting 93
Extra Volume 93, 339
Call Waiting 98
Calls
Auto Reject 337
Making a 79
Multi-party 97
Muting 95
Camcorder 209
Accessing the Video Folder
214
Options 210
Shooting Video 209
Camera 185
Best Photo 188
447

Burst Shot 190
Camera Options 188
Default Storage Location
193
Enabling Share Shot 198
Lock Screen Shortcut 368
Name Tag 194
Taking Pictures 186
Camercorder
Taking Pictures During
Video 213
Care and Maintenance 421
Charging battery 15
ChatON
Buddy photo share 196,
205
Children and Cell Phones 406
Chrome
Google 253
Clearing
Application cache and
data 281
Clock 368
CMAS 163, 164
Commercial Mobile Alerting
System (CMAS) 411
Configuration
Initial 19

448

Connections
Accessing the Internet
293
Contact
Copying to microSD Card
138
Creating a New 120
Joining 133
New From Keypad 123
Photo 207
Contact Entry
Options 132
Contact List
Options 130
Contact Menus
Options 131
Contacts
Adding a Number to
Existing 128
Adding a Pause or Wait
129
Adding Your Facebook
Friends 142
Additional Options 144
Deleting 129
Display Options 140, 145
Displaying Contacts by
Name 145

Export List to microSD
316, 384
First Name 145
Groups 146
Last Name First 145
Merge with Google 130
Merge with Samsung
Account 130
Sending All 137
Settings 145
Share Namecard Via 132
Sharing Settings 145
Sharing/Sending 136
Contacts List 79
Context Menus 127, 131
Navigation 70
Using 70
Contextual Awareness 351
Cookies
Emptying 301
CPU Usage
Display 394
Create Folder
Group Apps 54
Creating a Playlist 235
Creating and sending
Messages 151
Customizing
Home screens 71

D
Data
Auto Sync Data 330
Restrict Background Data
330
Data Limit
Setting 329
Data Usage
Cycle 329
Limiting 329
Date
Selecting Format 390
Date and Time 390
Default Notifications
Settings 349
Default Storage
Assigning 185
Camcorder 24, 185, 213
Camera 24, 185
Camera Storage 193
Deleting
Multiple Messages 160
Single Bubble 160
Single Message 160
Deleting a contact 129
Deregister
Web Storage 241
Desk Clock 254
Configuring 258
449

Desktop Backup Password
396
Device
Calibration 60
Reset 384
Device Options
Screen 347
Display
Icons 40
Settings 39
Status Bar 39
Using Negative Colors 392
Display / Touch-Screen 417
Displaying your phone
number 79
DivX
Locating VOD Number 219
Overview 219
Registering Your DivX
Device 220
Registration Code 398
Do cell phones pose a health
hazard? 400
Dock
Sound 389
Dongle
AllShare Cast Hub 245
Downloading
New application 278
450

Downloads 258
Internet Downloads 258
Other Downloads 258
Draft Messages 153
Dropbox 240
DTMF Tones 339, 345

E
Edit Page 72
Email 166
Changing Signature 170,
176
Composing 169
Configuring Settings 170
Creating an Internet
Account 167
Internet Email 167
Opening 168
Refreshing Messages 168
Sending 144
Wi-Fi Download of
Attachments 171, 177
Emergency
Alert Preview 163
Alerts 163
Tone 350
Emergency Alerts
AMBER 163
Configuration 164
Imminent Extreme 163

Message Settings 163
Severe 163
Emergency Calls 420
Making 82
With SIM 82
Without SIM 82
Emoticons 154
Ending
A call 81
Entering Text 104
Using SWYPE 105
Erasing files from
Memory card 356
Exchange Email 172
Account Setup 172
Composing 175
Configuring Settings 176
Deleting Message 176
Opening 175
Refreshing Messages 175
Exposure to Radio Frequency
(RF) Signals 400
Extra Volume 343
Extreme Alert
Disable 164

F
Face Unlock 363
Facebook
Personalize 379

Predictive Text 379
Swpe Connect 375
Facial Recognition 363
Factory Data Reset 384
Prior To 384
Favorites Tab 149
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility
(HAC) Regulations for
Wireless Devices 428
FCC Notice and Cautions 431
Folder
Create 53
Font
Size 352
Style 352
Font Size
Caption 290
Changing 392
Minimum Setting 304
Forgot Pattern? 366

G
Gallery
Folder Options 203
Opening 216
Picture-In-Picture 218
Games
Volume 348
Gestures
Browse Image 58
451

Overview 58
Screen Capture 59
Sensitivity Settings 59,
388
Shake to Update 59
Tilt to Zoom 58
Getting Started 8
Battery 13
Battery Cover 10
Locking/Unlocking the
Device 22
microSD card 12
Switching Device On/Off
21
Voicemail 26
Gmail 179, 259
Composing a Message
180
Creating an Additional
Account 182
Opening 180
Other Options 180
Personalize 379
Personalize Swype 375
Refreshing 180
Signing In 179
Viewing 181
Google
Ads 260
452

Create New Account 22
Merge Contacts 130
Retrieving Password 23
Set Search Engine 305
Settings 260
Signing into Your Account
23
Voice Typing 104
Google Books 275
Google Mail
see also Gmail 180
Google Maps
Enabling a location source
264
Opening a map 265
Google Music 223, 277
Google Now 29, 289
Adjust Settings 30
Google Places
See also Local 263
Google Talk
see Hangouts 182, 262
Google Voice Typing
Configuring 380
Using 118
Google+
Settings 260
GPS
Tagging Images 193, 212

GPS & AGPS 418
GPS Tag 190, 211
GPU
Force Rendering 394
Group Play 204, 261, 288
Sharing an Image 206
Sharing Pictures 261
Groups
Adding an Member to an
Existing Group 147
Creating a New Caller
Group 146
Deleting 148
Deleting a Caller Group
148
Editing a Caller Group 147
Removing an Entry 147
Settings 147
Gyroscope
Calibration 59, 60, 388

H
Handwriting 113
Settings 377
Hangout 262
Haptic
Auto 350
Haptic Feedback
Turn On/Off 356
Vibrate 350

Vibration Setting 348
HDR 189
Headset
In call Settings 338
Health and Safety Information
400
Hearing Aids 339
Help
In-Device 262
Hidden Applictions
Show 55
Hold
Placing a Call on Hold 94
Home 50
Home City
Setting 368
Home Key 49
Home Screen
Assigning a New 72
Changing Wallpaper 77
Menu Settings 53
Overview 50
Home screens
Customizing 71
Homepage
Setting New 299

I
Icons
Description 40
453

Indicator 40
Status 40
Images
Assigning as a Contact
icon 207
Assigning as wallpaper
208
Transferring 317, 384
Verifying 317, 384
Importing and Exporting
To micro SIM card 144
In Call
Options 93
In call
Options 96
Incognito 297
Create Window 298
Exit Window 298
Incoming Call
Vibration Setting 348
Indicator icons 40
Information Ticker 368
International Call 87
International Calls
Making 87
International Dialing
Changing the Prefix 344
Internet 293
Brightness Setting 295
454

Clear Cookies 303
Search 296
Set Home Page 303
Set New Homepage 299
Internet Downloads 258
Internet Email 166
IP Address 397

J
Joining
Contact information 133

K
Kies Air
Before Using 316

L
Language
Select 373
LDAP 130
Live Shooting 213
Live Wallpaper
Selecting 78
Local 263
Location
Settings 267
Location and Google Search
265, 272
Location and Google Services
361
Lock Pattern
If I Forgot My Pattern 366

Lock Screen 361
Camera Quick Access 368
Changing Wallpaper 78
Clock 368
Customizing Shortcuts
369
Dual Clock 368
Options 368, 369
Ripple Effect 368
Say Wake-Up Command
368
Shortcuts 368
Showing Owner Info 371
Ticker 368
Using Shortcuts 369
Viewing Missed Calls 103
Weather 368
Logs 99
Accessing 99
Accessing from
Notifications 100
Altering Numbers 102
Erasing 103
Low battery indicator 17

M
Making
Emergency Calls 82
International Calls 87
New call 79

Managing Applications
Clearing Application Cache
358
Uninstalling Third-party
Applications 359
Market
see Play Store 278
Marking contact
As a default 135
Memory card
Erasing files from the 356
Merge Calls 98
Merge with Google 130
Message
Options 153
Read 157
Reply 158
Thread Options 159
Threads 158
Message Search 161
Message threads 158
Messaging
Adding a Signature 163
Adding Attachments 155
Additional Text 156
Composing Options 154
Creating and sending 151
Creating and Sending Text
Messages 151
455

Deleting a message 160
Draft 153
Google Mail 179
Icons on the Status Bar
151
Insert Smiley 154
Locked 153
Menu Options 153
Options 153
Save 153, 154, 159
Settings 161
Signing into Google Mail
179
Text Templates 165
Types of Messages 150
Viewing new 157
micro SIM Card
Importing and Exporting
144
microSD Card
Insertion 12
Removal 13
Microsoft Exchange 121, 166
Missed Call
Viewing from Lock Screen
103
Mobile Data
Activate/Deactivate 329
Set Data Limit 329
456

Usage 331
Mobile Networks 331
Mobile Data 331
Mobile Web 293
Entering Text in the Mobile
Web Browser 295
Navigating with the Mobile
Web 293
Using Bookmarks 298
Mono
Audio Setup 393
Motion
Function Activation 386
On 207, 386
Using to Unlock 362
Motion Settings 386
Mounting the SD card 355
Multi Window
Activate/Deactivate 61,
351
Customizing 64
Increase App Window Size
67
Maximize App 68
Panel Relocation 63
Rearrange Apps 64
Removing Apps 65
Restoring Apps 65
Running Multiple Apps 66

Switch Arrangement 67
Tab Repositioning 63
Using 61
Multi-Party Calls 97
Setting up 97
Multi-Tasking
Background Calling 81
Watching Videos 218
Music 268
Volume 348
Music App
Adding Songs to Playlists
230
Changing Library View
224
Changing Settings 225
Creating a Playlist 229
Deleting a Playlist 230
Listening 225
Music Application 223
Now Playing Screen 227
Options While Playing 228
Playing 226
Playing a Playlist 230
Searching for Music 225
Tab Options 227
Music File Extensions
3GP 232
AAC 232

AAC+ 232
eAAC+ 232
M4A 232
MP3 232
MP4 232
WMA 232
Music Files
Removing 237
Transferring 236
Music Player
Adding Music 235
Creating a Playlist 235
Editing a Playlist 236
Making a Song a Ringtone
233
Options 233
Playing Music 232
Removing Music 236
Using Playlists 235
MusicPlayer 232
My Account Downloader 269
My Call Sound 338

N
Name Tag 194
Namecard
Sending 136
Sending All 137
Share Via 136

457

Navigating
Application Menus 68
Sub-Menus 69
Through Screens 55
Navigation
Enable GPS 272
Go Home 272
Options 272
Negative Colors 392
Network connection
Adding a new 319
New applications
Downloading 278
NFC (Near Field
Communication) 333
Noise Reduction 97
Non-Market Applications 280
Notification
Vibration Setting 348
Volume 348
Notification Bar 47
Using 47

O
On/Off Switch 21
Operating Environment 425
Organizer
Calculator 249
World Clock 256

458

Other Downloads 258
Other Important Safety
Information 432
Out of Office
Message 177
Settings 177
Outlook 166
Overview
Home Screen 50
Owner Information 371

P
Page Buddy 351
Passwords
Make Visible 372
Pause
Adding to a Contact 129
Pause Dialing 87
Personal Localized Alerting
Network (PLAN) 411
Phone
Icons 40
Switching on/off 21
Phone number
Finding 79
Phone Ringtone 348
Phone Vibration 349
Photos
Options 195, 204, 214
Sharing 195, 204, 214

Picture
Set As 207
Sharing via Group Play
206
Picture-In-Picture 218
Pictures
Instant Sharing 198
Sharing 197, 201
Play Books 275
Play Music 277
Play Store 278
Quick Access 54
Play Videos
Picture-In-Picture 218
Pointer Speed
Configuration 383
Power 48
Auto Adjust Screen Tone
352
Power Saving 48
Background Color 356
CPU Power 356
Haptic Feedback 356
LCD Adjustment 352
Learning About 357
Screen Power 356
Power Saving Mode 356
Predictive Text
Activation 379

Primary Shortcuts 52
Adding and Deleting 75
Customizing 75
Replacing 75

Q
Quick Dialing 80
Quick Messaging 152

R
Reader Mode
Using 296
Recently-used Applications
Accessing 70
Redialing the last number 88
Reducing Exposure
Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories 404
Reject Call
Rejection Messages 337
Reject Calls
Managing 85
Reject List
Add to 101, 102
Auto Reject 86
Rejection List
Assigning Multiple
Numbers 86
Assigning Single Numbers
86

459

Rejection Messages 337
Reset 384
Reset Device 384
Responsible Listening 422
Restarting
Device 21
Restore 383
Restrict
Background Data 330
Restricting Children's Access
to Your Mobile device 431
Ringtone
Assigning 344
Device 348
Volume 348
Ripple 368
Ripple Effect
Lock Screen 368

S
S Beam 334
On 201, 334
Sharing Multiple Pictures
203
Sharing Pictures 201
S Memo
Creating a New Memo 282
S Voice 284
Require Wake-Up 368

460

Set Wake-Up Command
368
Using 91
Samsung Account
Creating 25
Merge Contacts 130
Samsung Keyboard 111
ABC Mode 115
Changing the Input Type
114
Enabling 111
Handwriting Settings 377
Settings 377
Symbol/Numeric Mode
116
XT9 Advanced Settings
378
Samsung Keypad
Entering Symbols 116
Samsung Link
Configuring Settings 239
Definitions 285
Deregister Storage 241
Sharing Media 241
Web Storage Setup 240
Samsung Mobile Products
and Recycling 415
Save a Number
From Keypad 123

Save Messages 153, 154,
159
Scan for Nearby Devices 205,
215, 234
Screen
Home 50
Navigation 55
Screen Capture 59, 206
Taking a Screen Shot 207
Screen Lock
Set Up 364
Sounds 350
Screen Lock Pattern
Changing 365
Creating 364
Deleting 365
Forgot My Pattern 366
Screen Rotation 48
Auto-Rotate 351
Screen Sharing
Via Group Play 206
Screen Timeout 352
Screen Unlock
Face and Voice Unlock
363
Face Unlock 363
Motion 362
Swipe 362

Screens
Adding and Deleting 71
Customizing 71
Rearranging 72
SD card
Mounting the 355
Unmounting 355
Search Engine 305
Sending a Namecard 136
Sensitivity Settings 388
Setting an alarm 254
Setting up
Voicemail 26
Settings 321
Accessing 321
Browser 303
Contact list 145
Display 39
Enabling the GPS Satellites
361
Enabling Wireless
Locations 360
Messaging 161
Wallpaper 78
Setup
Initial 19
Severe Alert
Disable 164

461

Share Applications 73
Share Shot 189, 198
Auto 193
Configuring 200
Enabling 199
Stop Sharing 200
Taking Images 200
Shortcuts
Adding from Application
Screen 74
Adding from Home Screen
74
Deleting from a Screen 74
Managing 73
Primary 52
SIM
Micro 8
SkyDrive 240
Smart Alarm 255
Smart Practices While Driving
411
Smart Rotation 352
Smart Stay 352
Smart Switch 31
Snooze 256
Repeat 255

462

SNS 141
Social Network
Adding Facebook Contacts
142
Resync 143
Social Networking
Adding Contacts From 141
Software Updates 397
Song
Set As 234
Sound Balance 392
Sounds
Turn Off All 393
Speakerphone
Turning on and off 94
Specific Absorption Rate
(SAR) Certification
Information 407
Speed Dial
Changing an entry 90
Making a call 91
Removing an entry 90
Setting up entries 89
Standard Mode 346
Starter Mode 346
Status Bar 39
Sub-Menus
Navigation 69

SugarSync 240
Switching to a Bluetooth
During a call 95
Swpe
Backup and Sync 375
Swype 104
123ABC Mode 109
ABC Mode 107
Cellular Data 376
Contribute Usage Data
376
Entering Numbers 110
Entering Symbols 110
Entering Text 105
Gestures 376
Keyboard Mode 107
Languages 376
Select Text Input Mode
107
Settings 374
Social integration 375
SYM mode 107
Updates 376
System Tone
Settings 350
Systeme
Volume 348

T
T9 Trace 377
Tag Buddy 195, 204, 215
Task Manger
Overview 28
Text
Adjusting Size 304
Minimum Font Size 304
Soom Amount on Double
Tap 304
Text Input
Methods 104
Text Input Method
Selecting 105
Text Templates 165
Create Your Own 165
Text To Speech 382
Text-to-speech
Configuration 382
Third-Party Applications 359
Uninstalling 281
Time Zone
Selecting 390
Timer
Automatic Answering
338, 342
Tington
Assigning 339

463

Tools
Camera 186
Touches
Show 394
TrackPad
Configure 383
Transferring Large Files 201,
334
Transferring Music Files 236
TTS 382
TTY Mode 345
Twitter
Personalize Swype 375
Predictive Text 379

U
UL Certified Travel Charger
417
Understanding Your Device
31
Back View 37
Display 39
Features 31
Front View 34
Home 50
Side Views 38
Uninstalling
Third-party applications
281

464

Unknown Sources 280
Unlock
Options 368
Using Face 363
Using Voice 363
Unmounting
SD card 355
US Dialing 339
Usage
Battery 357
USB Connections
As Storage Device 316
USB Debugging 395
USB Settings
As Storage Device 316
Use GPS Satellites 265, 272,
361
Use Wireless Networks 265,
272, 360
Using Favorites
Adding Favorites 300

V
Vibrate 339
Activate/Deactivate 344
Vibration
Device 349
Intensity Setup 348
Video
Volume 348

Video Player
Picture-In-Picture 218
Sharing Videos 217
Videos
Default Storage Location
213
Options 197
Voice Input
Recognition 381
Voice Privacy 339
Voice Search 289, 381
Voice Typing 104
Configuring 380
Using 118
Voicemail 343
Accessing 27
Accessing from another
phone 27
Setting up 26
Volume Settings
Adjusting 348
VPN
Adding 332
Settings 331
VPN Client 290

W
Wait 88, 129
Adding to a Contact 129

Wait dialing 88
Wallpaper
Assign Home 53
Home and Lock Screens
78
Wallpapers
Assigning from Gallery
196, 205
Changing Home Screen
77
Changing Lock Screen 78
Changing via Settings
Menu 78
Managing 77
Weather
Setting 368
Web 293
History 302
Web applications
enable downloading 314
Widget
Adding Widgets 53
Widgets
Adding and Removing 76
Moving to a Different
Screen 76
Settings 287
Stopwatch 257

465

Wi-Fi
About 317
Activating 318, 321
Advanced settings 320
Connecting to 318
Deactivating 320
Direct Connection 326
During Sleep 322
MAC Address 323
Manually Adding Network
324
Manually scan for network
320
Off 320
On 318, 320, 321
Settings 321
Show Usage 330
Status icons 319
Wi-Fi Direct 326
Activate and Connect 326
On 198, 326
World Clock
DST Settings 256
WPS PIN
Pairing 325
WPS Push Button
Connect 325
Pairing 325

466

Y
Yahoo! 305
YouTube
High Quality 292
High Qulaity 247
Settings 290

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : No
Author                          : psalvado
Create Date                     : 2013:07:18 14:20:35Z
Enhanced                        : By PDF Enhancer 3.1/Win
Modify Date                     : 2013:12:16 10:45:00-06:00
SPDF                            : 1112
Subject                         : S968C
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : psalvado
Title                           : TracFone SCH-S968C Samsung Galaxy S III
Description                     : S968C
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 9.0
Metadata Date                   : 2013:12:16 10:45-06:00
Spdf                            : 1112
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.1 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:52dad474-41b9-44ee-9346-822e91cfe5e3
Instance ID                     : uuid:055a796d-1ef9-4e07-b757-90d0fcb81691
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 474

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Samsung TracFone SCH S968C Galaxy S III (7.1 MB) TF English User Manual MG3 F5

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation